2004 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ...... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ...... 4-1 Front Seats ...... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2 Rear Seats ...... 1-7 Towing ...... 4-30 Safety Belts ...... 1-8 Service and Appearance Care ...... 5-1 Child Restraints ...... 1-27 Service ...... 5-3 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 1-47 Fuel ...... 5-4 Restraint System Check ...... 1-56 Checking Things Under the Hood ...... 5-10 Features and Controls ...... 2-1 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-51 Keys ...... 2-2 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-52 Doors and Locks ...... 2-7 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 5-60 Windows ...... 2-11 Tires ...... 5-61 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-13 Appearance Care ...... 5-89 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ...... 2-16 Vehicle Identiﬁcation ...... 5-97 Mirrors ...... 2-35 Electrical System ...... 5-97 Storage Areas ...... 2-37 Capacities and Speciﬁcations ...... 5-101 Sunroof ...... 2-42 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 5-103 Instrument Panel ...... 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1 Instrument Panel Overview ...... 3-2 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-2 Climate Controls ...... 3-19 Customer Assistance Information ...... 7-1 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ...... 3-25 Customer Assistance Information ...... 7-2 Audio System(s) ...... 3-41 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 7-10 Index ...... 1 Canadian Owners You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your dealer or from: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem are registered trademarks How to Use This Manual and the name VIBE is a trademark of General Motors Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning Corporation. to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If This manual includes the latest information at the time it you do this, it will help you learn about the features and was printed. We reserve the right to make changes controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find after that time without further notice. For vehicles first that pictures and words work together to explain things. sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it Index appears in this manual. Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be A good place to look for what you need is the Index in there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. new owner can use it.

Litho in U.S.A. ©Copyright General Motors Corporation 05/05/03 Part No. 04VIBE A First Edition All Rights Reserved ii Safety Warnings and Symbols You will also ﬁnd a circle with a slash through it in You will ﬁnd a number of safety cautions in this book. this book. This safety We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about symbol means “Don’t,” things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let warning. this happen.”

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.

iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle, Notice: These mean there is something that could are shown along with the text describing the operation damage your vehicle. or information relating to a specific component, control, A notice will tell you about something that can damage message, gage or indicator. your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be If you need help figuring out a specific name of a covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the component, gage or indicator, reference the following notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the topics: damage. • Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different • Features and Controls in Section 2 words. • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use • Climate Controls in Section 3 the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. • Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3 • Audio System(s) in Section 3 • Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may ﬁnd on your vehicle:

v ✍ NOTES

vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats ...... 1-2 Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-36 Manual Seats ...... 1-2 Top Strap ...... 1-36 Driver Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 Top Strap Anchor Location ...... 1-38 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-3 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers Head Restraints ...... 1-5 for Children (LATCH System) ...... 1-39 Passenger Folding Seatback ...... 1-5 Securing a Child Restraint Designed Rear Seats ...... 1-7 for the LATCH System ...... 1-41 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-7 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ...... 1-42 Safety Belts ...... 1-8 Securing a Child Restraint in the Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ...... 1-8 Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-44 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 1-14 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 1-47 Driver Position ...... 1-14 Where Are the Air Bags? ...... 1-50 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-21 When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ...... 1-52 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-22 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ...... 1-53 Rear Seat Passengers ...... 1-22 How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ...... 1-53 Safety Belt Pretensioners ...... 1-26 What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-54 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-26 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-56 Child Restraints ...... 1-27 Restraint System Check ...... 1-56 Older Children ...... 1-27 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-56 Infants and Young Children ...... 1-29 Replacing Restraint System Parts Child Restraint Systems ...... 1-33 After a Crash ...... 1-57

1-1 Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. Lift the bar located under the front seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked into place. Don’t put anything under the front seats. Items under the seats could keep the seats from locking into place properly.

1-2 Driver Seat Height Adjuster Reclining Seatbacks

Turn the knob located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion to adjust the height of the driver’s seat.

It is easier to use the adjuster when the seat is unoccupied. Make sure the ignition is off and the vehicle is in PARK (P) before adjusting the seat. To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Push on the seat to make sure it’s locked into position. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback, and the seat will go to its original upright position.

1-3 {CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is injuries. moving. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

1-4 Head Restraints Passenger Folding Seatback

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is not near an air bag. In a crash, an inﬂating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inﬂate. For more information, see “Where Are the Air Bags?” and “Loading Your Vehicle,” in the Index.

You can also fold the front passenger’s seatback down to allow for more cargo space or as a temporary Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint table while the vehicle is stopped. is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Press the release button near the base of the restraint to lower and raise the restraint to a comfortable position.

1-5 To fold the seatback down, do the following: 1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position and make sure the seatback is at the most upright position and locked. 2. Pull up on one of the levers located on either side of the back of the passenger’s seatback.

3. Fold the seatback down. To raise the seatback, do the following: 1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it into place. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted or caught in the seatback. 2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it is locked into position. 3. Use the reclining front seatback lever to adjust the seatback to a comfortable position.

1-6 Rear Seats {CAUTION: Rear Seat Operation A safety belt that is improperly routed, not You can fold either side of the seatback down for more properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the cargo space. The rear right side seatback can also protection needed in a crash. The person be used as a temporary table while the vehicle is stopped. Make sure the front seatback isn’t reclined or wearing the belt could be seriously injured. in the rearward most position. If it is, the rear seatback After raising the rear seatback, always check won’t fold down all the way. to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. {CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1-7 To fold either seatback down, do the following: Safety Belts 1. Pull up on the lock release knob, located on the top of the Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone seatbacks. This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t 2. Fold the seatback down. Each seatback can be wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a folded separately. crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, To raise the seatback, do the following: your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. 1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock it into You can be seriously injured or killed. In the place. Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or same crash, you might not be, if you are caught in the seatback. buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, 2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it and check that your passengers’ belts are is locked into position. fastened properly too.

1-8 In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law {CAUTION: says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive. collision, people riding in these areas are more But most crashes are in between. In many of them, likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt that is not equipped with seats and safety or killed. belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the seat and using a safety belt properly. facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot!

Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-28.

1-9 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-10 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something. doesn’t stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-11 or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.

1-12 Questions and Answers About Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from Safety Belts home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an Q: your passengers can be hurt. Being a good accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety control, such as bad drivers. belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of even if you’re upside down. And your chance home. And the greatest number of serious injuries of being conscious during and after an accident, and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if (65 km/h). you are belted. Safety belts are for everyone.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Lap-Shoulder Belt This part is only for people of adult size. The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different 1. Close and lock the door. rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27 how, see “Seats” in the Index. or Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted.

1-14 The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-26. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

1-15 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. To move it down, squeeze the button and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the release 6. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug button to make sure it has on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this locked into position. applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-16 Q: What’s wrong with this? {CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should ﬁt against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-17 Q: What’s wrong with this? {CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-18 Q: What’s wrong with this? {CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-19 Q: What’s wrong with this? {CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to ﬁx it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-21 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Rear Seat Passengers mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the safety belts effective is wearing them properly. rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Right Front Passenger Position Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14. The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same Rear Seat Passenger Positions way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.

1-22 Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s If the buckle does not click, check to be sure how to wear one properly. that you are using the correct buckle. The buckle for the center rear passenger position has the word CENTER on it. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-26. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1-23 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

1-24 The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should ﬁt against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-25 Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Extender Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor should use it. part of the safety belts for the driver and right front But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go forward movement in a moderate to severe crash in in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so which the front of the vehicle hits something. the extender will be long enough for you. The extender Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a will be just for you, and just for the seat in your crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing and use it only for the seat it is made to ﬁt. To wear Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-57. it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

1-26 Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a Older Children lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should ﬁt snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-27 {CAUTION:

Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position, move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that the belts provide.

1-28 {CAUTION:

Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

1-29 Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the {CAUTION: vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice. People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

1-30 {CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inﬂates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

1-31 For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a { child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used CAUTION: in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle The body structure of a young child is quite safety standards. unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come the safety belts are designed. A young child’s with the restraint state the weight and height hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, regular safety belt may not remain low on the there are many kinds of restraints available for hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle children with special needs. up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that’s unprotected by any bony structure. This alone {CAUTION: could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in Newborn infants need complete support, appropriate child restraints. including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints.

1-32 Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. to restrain or position a child on a continuous ﬂat surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

1-33 A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes improve the ﬁt of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a ﬁve-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-34 Q: How do child restraints work? When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it A: A child restraint system is any device designed for will have a label saying that it meets federal motor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position vehicle safety standards. children. A built-in child restraint system is a Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a child restraint system is a portable one, which booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured For many years, add-on child restraints have used within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt to this manual. The child restraint instructions are system secures the add-on child restraint in the important, so if they are not available, obtain a vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness replacement copy from the manufacturer. system holds the child in place within the restraint. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.

1-35 Where to Put the Restraint Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We, move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child is in it. seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why: Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It { can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. CAUTION: For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be are designed for use with or without the top strap being seriously injured or killed if the right front anchored. Others require the top strap always to be passenger’s air bag inﬂates. This is because anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the back of the rear-facing child restraint your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is would be very close to the inﬂating air bag. anchored properly. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit in the right front seat, always move the front is available. passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-36 {CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor is designed to anchor only one child restraint. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured if this happens. To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under anchored. In the United States, some child restraints it. See Head Restraints on page 1-5. also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be top strap, it should be anchored. ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say.

1-37 Top Strap Anchor Location To access the anchors, open the compartment doors marked with the child restraint anchor symbol.

Anchor the top strap to one of the top strap anchors. Your vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seating positions. You will ﬁnd three top strap anchors in a covered compartment on the ﬂoor of the rear cargo area.

1-38 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System)

Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will ﬁnd anchors (A) for both outside rear seat positions. This system, designed to make installation of child restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether strap (C).

1-39 In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child need a child restraint designed for that system. restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH system has a label on the seatback at each lower anchor position. To assist you in locating the anchors for this child restraint system, place your hand in a palm-up position and reach up between the seat cushion and the seatback, just under the label.

1-40 Securing a Child Restraint Designed {CAUTION: for the LATCH System 1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be back of the seat cushion. able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is 3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the properly installed using the anchorage points, anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show you how. or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint 4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” in page 1-36. Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions. the Index for information on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points.

1-41 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap on page 1-36 if the child restraint has one. If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions 3. Buckle the belt. If the buckle does not click, check that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the to be sure that you are using the correct buckle. child restraint when and as the instructions say. The buckle for the center rear passenger position has the word CENTER on it. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Make sure the release button is positioned so you 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or if you ever had to. around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

1-42 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor to set the lock. the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-43 Securing a Child Restraint in the If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH Right Front Seat Position System) on page 1-39. See Top Strap on page 1-36 if the child restraint has one. If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: See Manual Seats on page 1-2. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. { 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder CAUTION: portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be will show you how. seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

1-44 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock. safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-45 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may ﬁnd it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

1-46 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) This part explains the frontal and side impact Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) or air bag systems. Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for the driver and another frontal air bag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact air bags – a side impact air bag for the driver and another side impact air bag for the right front passenger. If your vehicle has side impact air bags, it will say SRS-SIDE AIR BAG on a label on the side of the driver’s and right front passenger’s seat closest to the door. Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inﬂating frontal air bag. But these air bags must inﬂate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations.

1-47 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems: CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: The side impact air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where You can be severely injured or killed in a crash something hits the side of your vehicle. They if you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even if aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt or in rear crashes. during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work belt properly – whether or not there’s an air with safety belts but don’t replace them. bag for that person. Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. CAUTION: (Continued)

1-48 {CAUTION: CAUTION: (Continued) belts offer the best protection for adults, but Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate not for young children and infants. Neither with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you system is designed for them. Young children would be if you were leaning forward, it could and infants need the protection that a child seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep restraint system can provide. Always secure youin position for air bag inflation before and children properly in your vehicle. To read how, during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, see the part of this manual called “Older even with frontal air bags. The driver should sit Children” or “Infants and Young Children.” as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door. There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the air bag symbol. {CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inﬂates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical CAUTION: (Continued) problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-30 for more information.

1-49 Where Are the Air Bags?

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag is steering wheel. in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-50 {CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag.

If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

1-51 When Should an Air Bag Inflate? It is possible that, in a crash involving the front of your vehicle, only one of the two frontal air bags in your The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags vehicle will deploy. This is rare, but it can happen in a are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal crash just severe enough to make a frontal air bag or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate inflate. only if the impact speed is above the system’s In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air designed “threshold level.” bag should have inflated simply because of the damage In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. air bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant. The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

1-52 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? frontal air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing would not help you in many types of collisions, system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion related hardware are all part of the air bag modules. is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering be regarded as anything more than a supplement to wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate passenger’s door. to severe side collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bag. How Does an Air Bag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the

1-53 What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? {CAUTION: After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the Some components of the air bag module – the steering air. This dust could cause breathing problems wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for for people with a history of asthma or other the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in closest to the door for the driver and right passenger’s the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe side impact air bags – will be hot for a short time. The to do so. If you have breathing problems but parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke inflates, then get fresh air by opening a and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. window or a door. If you experience breathing Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or problems following an air bag deployment, you being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. should seek medical attention.

1-54 In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the bag covering on the driver’s and right front right front passenger air bag. passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work • Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel, both the air bag air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for module and the instrument panel for the right front your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module bag system won’t be there to help protect you and seatback for the driver’s and right front in another crash. A new system will include air bag passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or modules and possibly other parts. The service break the air bag coverings. manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water – such as water up to the carpeting or higher – or if water enters • Your vehicle is equipped with two electronic frontal your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish controller can be soaked and ruined. If this ever between a moderate frontal impact and a more happens, and then you start your vehicle, the damage severe frontal impact. Additionally, your vehicle has could make the frontal and side impact air bags two sensors which detect side impacts. These inflate and safety belt pretensioners activate, even if sensors signal the appropriate side air bag to inflate. there’s no crash. You would have to replace the Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash sensing air bags, all the sensors and related parts, parts of the and diagnostic module, which records information safety belt system and parts of the driver and right about the frontal air bag system. The module front passenger’s seatbacks. If your vehicle is ever in a records information about the readiness of the flood, or if it’s exposed to water that soaks the carpet, system, system status and the driver’s and you can avoid needless repair costs by turning off passenger’s safety belt usage at deployment. the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the battery • Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any systems. Improper service can mean that an air circumstances. See your dealer for service. bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

1-55 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Restraint System Check Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. Checking Your Restraint Systems There are parts of the air bag systems in several places Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors manual have information about servicing your vehicle and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. { Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a CAUTION: crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. For up to two minutes after the ignition key is Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and turned off and the battery is disconnected, an have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system air bag can still inflate during improper does not need regular maintenance.) service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

1-56 Replacing Restraint System Parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts. After a Crash If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. {CAUTION: New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may If the frontal air bags inﬂate, you will also need to not properly protect the person using it, replace the driver’s and right front passengr’s safety belt resulting in serious injury or even death in a retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in a crash. To help make sure your restraint collision. systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary If an air bag inﬂates, you’ll need to replace air bag replacements made as soon as possible. system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH system parts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.

1-57 ✍ NOTES

1-58 Section 2 Features and Controls

Keys ...... 2-2 Shifting Into Park (P) ...... 2-28 Remote Keyless Entry System ...... 2-4 Shifting Out of Park (P) ...... 2-30 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...... 2-5 Parking Your Vehicle ...... 2-31 Doors and Locks ...... 2-7 Parking Over Things That Burn ...... 2-32 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Engine Exhaust ...... 2-33 Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-34 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-8 Mirrors ...... 2-35 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-9 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-35 Liftgate/Liftglass ...... 2-9 Outside Remote Control Mirrors ...... 2-36 Windows ...... 2-11 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-36 Manual Windows ...... 2-11 Storage Areas ...... 2-37 Power Windows ...... 2-12 Glove Box ...... 2-37 Sun Visors ...... 2-13 Cupholder(s) ...... 2-37 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-13 Coinholder(s) ...... 2-37 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-13 Instrument Panel Storage Area ...... 2-37 Center Console Storage Area ...... 2-37 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ...... 2-16 Floor Mats ...... 2-37 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-16 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-38 Ignition Positions ...... 2-16 Rear Storage Area ...... 2-40 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-18 Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ...... 2-40 Engine Coolant Heater ...... 2-19 Cargo Cover ...... 2-41 Automatic Transaxle Operation ...... 2-20 Manual Transaxle Operation ...... 2-23 Sunroof ...... 2-42 Parking Brake ...... 2-27

2-1 Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2 One key is used for the Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a ignition, the doors and all qualiﬁed locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the other locks. tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily using this code. If you need a new key, contact your dealership to obtain the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more information. Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have spare keys.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the key tag from the key and gives it to the ﬁrst owner.

2-3 Remote Keyless Entry System At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer radio frequency subject to Federal Communications to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. • Check the distance. You may be too far from your This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. vehicle. You may need to stand closer during Operation is subject to the following two conditions: rainy or snowy weather. 1. This device may not cause interference, and • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may 2. This device must accept any interference received, be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the including interference that may cause undesired left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and operation of the device. try again. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. • Check to determine if battery replacement is Operation is subject to the following two conditions: necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on 1. This device may not cause interference, and page 2-5. 2. This device must accept any interference received, • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a including interference that may cause undesired qualiﬁed technician for service. operation of the device. Changes or modiﬁcations to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System UNLOCK: Press this button once to unlock the driver’s door. The turn signal lights will ﬂash twice and the Operation interior lamps will come on to conﬁrm that the door has unlocked. If the UNLOCK button is pressed again If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock within three seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet The interior lamps will stay on for 15 seconds or until the (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter ignition is turned on. If the UNLOCK button is pressed supplied with your vehicle. and no door is opened, the doors will lock automatically LOCK: Press this button to after 30 seconds. lock all of the doors. HATCH: Press this button for a few seconds to open the rear liftglass. If the ignition key is in the ON position, the liftglass cannot be opened by the HATCH button on the transmitter.

The turn signal lights will ﬂash once to conﬁrm that the doors have locked. The remote keyless entry system will not operate while the doors are open, the key is in the ignition or if the liftglass or hatch are not completely closed and latched.

2-5 Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it.

Battery Replacement To replace the battery, do the following: Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless 1. Insert a small coin or similar object to separate the entry transmitter should last about three years. bottom half from the top half of the transmitter. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t 2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new work at the normal range in any location. If you have one. Make sure the positive side of the battery to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, faces upward. For battery replacement, use it’s probably time to change the battery. a three-volt battery, type CR2032, or equivalent. Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to 3. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body no moisture can enter. transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

2-6 Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped. See Remote Keyless Entry Door Locks System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers — especially children — can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle won’t open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child To manually lock the door from the inside, press the can be overcome by extreme heat and can knob on the door forward. To unlock the door, press the suffer permanent injuries or even death knob rearward. If you have manual locks, you must from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle use the key to lock and unlock the liftgate. whenever you leave it. • Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening.

2-7 If your vehicle has power door locks, open the driver’s Rear Door Security Locks door by turning the key in the lock toward the rear of the vehicle. Turning the key back toward the center, then Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks toward the rear again will unlock all of the doors. Using that help prevent passengers from opening the rear the key in the passenger’s door will also unlock all of doors on your vehicle from the inside. the doors. The security locks are Lock a door by turning the key toward the front of the located on the inside of vehicle. If you have power door locks, all the doors the rear door trim. will lock. Power Door Locks

If your vehicle has this feature, the power door lock switch is located on the armrest on the door.

To use these locks, do the following: 1. Slide the lever down. 2. Close the door. 3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock. The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from e (Power Door Lock): Press the power door lock the inside when this feature is in use. switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door to lock or unlock all the doors at once.

2-8 To open a rear door with the security lock, do the Liftgate/Liftglass following: 1. Unlock the door from the inside. 2. Then open the door from the outside. {CAUTION: If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults and older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) and older children know how these security locks gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see work, and how to cancel the locks. or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following: and even death. If you must drive with the 1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other door from the outside. cable connections must pass through the seal 2. Slide the lever up. between the body and the liftgate or liftglass: • Make sure all other windows are shut. 3. Do the same for the other rear door. • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling The rear door locks will now work normally. system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air Leaving Your Vehicle into your vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in the Index. If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your • If you have air outlets on or under the door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and instrument panel, open them all the way. close the door. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-9 Liftgate/Liftglass Release To open the liftgate using your key insert the key into the keyhole and turn the key counterclockwise. Raise the liftgate by hand.

Use the handle in the center of the liftglass to help in lifting the glass.

You can also release the liftglass by pressing the When closing the liftgate, you can use the handle to pull release button (if equipped) it down. located on the instrument panel to the left of the To lock the liftgate, turn the key clockwise to the ﬁrst steering wheel. position. To open the liftglass using your key insert the key into the keyhole and turn the key clockwise to the second position.

2-10 Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual Windows Use the window crank to open and close each window.

2-11 Power Windows AUTO (Express-Down): Press this switch all the way down and release it to lower the driver’s window quickly. If your vehicle has this option, the switches Lock-Out: Press the controlling the driver’s window lock-out button, and passenger’s windows located next to the driver’s are located on the power door lock switch, to driver’s door. disable the passenger’s power window switches. Press the button again to enable the window switches.

The driver can still control the left front passenger The power window switch on each passenger door window with the lock-out button pressed. controls that window only. These switches work while the ignition is on. For the front windows, press the front of a switch to lower a window and lift the front of the switch to raise a window. For the rear windows, the power window lever is located on each door below the arm rest.

2-12 Sun Visors Theft-Deterrent Systems To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. can also swing them to the side. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent The visors can also be extended for more coverage. features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it Swing the visor down and to the side and then slide the impossible to steal. However, there are ways you visor out to extend it. Do not extend the visor when it can help. is in the forward position, only when it is at the side of the vehicle. Content Theft-Deterrent Visor Vanity Mirror If your vehicle has this feature, the theft-deterrent system is designed to activate an alarm if any of the Swing down the driver’s sun visor and lift the cover to side doors or the liftgate is forcibly unlocked or if expose the vanity mirror. The passenger side of the battery terminal is disconnected and then the vehicle also has a vanity mirror. Swing down the reconnected while the system is set. visor to expose the mirror. The alarm will sound the horn intermittently and ﬂash the headlamps, turn signal lamps and interior lights. If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors are unlocked forcibly, the other side doors and the liftgate will be locked automatically.

2-13 Arming the System 4. After the indicator light starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle. To arm the system, do the following: Do not leave anyone in the vehicle when you set 1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and the system, because unlocking the vehicle from the remove it. inside will activate the system. 2. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Testing the Alarm 3. Close and lock all the side doors and liftgate with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter. To test the alarm, do the following: The indicator light located 1. Open all the windows. on the instrument panel to 2. Set the system as described in the previous the left of the steering procedure. The side doors and liftgate should wheel will come on when be locked with the key or remote keyless entry all the side doors and transmitter. Be sure to wait until the indicator light liftgate are closed starts flashing. and locked. 3. Unlock the driver’s door from the inside. The system should activate the alarm. 4. Stop the alarm as described in the disarming procedure. 5. Repeat this operation for the other doors. Also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then The system will be automatically set after 30 seconds. reconnected. When the system is set, the indicator light will start flashing. If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your dealer.

2-14 How the System Alarm is Activated Reactivating the System The system will activate the alarm under the following Once the system is set, it will automatically reset the conditions: alarm after the alarm stops. The alarm will activate again • If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is unlocked under the same conditions as described earlier. or if any of the other side doors or the liftgate is Disarming the System forcibly opened without the key or remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm can be disarmed by doing one of the following: • If the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected. • Turn the ignition key from LOCK to ON. • If the ignition is hot-wired. • Unlock any of the side doors with the key or with the remote keyless entry transmitter. • If the side window glass is broken or damaged. If the liftgate or liftglass is opened with the key, the The indicator light will come on when the system system will still be activated. is activated. If the driver’s or front passenger’s side doors are unlocked without using the key or remote keyless entry transmitter, the other side doors and the liftgate will be automatically locked again. After one minute the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will start ﬂashing again.

2-15 Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions Vehicle With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to four different positions. New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Don’t drive at any one speed — fast or slow — for the ﬁrst 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. • Avoid making hard stops for the ﬁrst 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. • Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you a Trailer” in the Index for more information. can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle needs service.

2-16 (A) LOCK: This is the only position from which you can (C) ON: This is the position the switch returns to after remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, you start your engine and release the switch. The switch ignition and automatic transaxle. Push in the ignition stays in the ON position when the engine is running. switch as you turn the key toward you. But even when the ignition is not running, you can use ON to operate your electrical accessories (including If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switch the ventilation fan and 115 volt power outlet) and can’t be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is in to display some warning and indicator lights. PARK (P). (D) START: This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch {CAUTION: will return to ON for normal driving. When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key to operate some of your electrical accessories. to LOCK and removing it will lock the steering A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door column and result in a loss of ability to steer when the ignition is still in ACC or LOCK and the the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you key is in the ignition. need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to ACC. Don’t push the key in while the vehicle is moving.

(B) ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of your electrical accessories (such as the radio, but not the ventilation fan). It unlocks the steering wheel and ignition. To move the key from ACC to LOCK, push in the key and then turn it to LOCK.

2-17 Starting Your Engine can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining Automatic Transaxle your battery or damaging your starter. 2. If it doesn’t start, wait about 15 seconds and try Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). again to start the engine by turning the ignition Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a key to START. Wait about 15 seconds between safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, each try. use NEUTRAL (N) only. When your engine has run about 10 seconds to Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the “race” your engine when it’s cold. transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let vehicle is stopped. the engine run for a few minutes to warm up. Manual Transaxle 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. The shift lever should be in neutral and the parking Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and floor and holding it there as you hold the key in start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts pedal is not all the way down – that’s a safety feature. briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. Starting Your Engine This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical go of the key. The idle speed will go down as parts or accessories, you could change the way the your engine gets warm. engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to might not perform properly. be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat

2-18 Engine Coolant Heater In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine {CAUTION: coolant heater, if equipped, can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged could cause an electrical shock. Also, the in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your wrong kind of extension cord could overheat vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the and cause a ﬁre. You could be seriously coolant heater is not required. injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded To Use the Engine Coolant Heater three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong 1. Turn off the engine. extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the front. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

2-19 Automatic Transaxle Operation {CAUTION: There are several different positions for your shift lever. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a best position to use when you start your engine Trailer” in the Index. because your vehicle can’t move easily.

2-20 Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully {CAUTION: apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. lever, push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and Unless your foot is ﬁrmly on the brake pedal, release the shift lever button as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move your vehicle could move very rapidly. You the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting could lose control and hit people or objects. Out of Park (P) on page 2-30. Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine is racing. REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by is moving forward could damage your transaxle. shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’t Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is covered by your warranty. stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If need more power for passing, and you’re: You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on • Going less than about 27 mph (43 km/h), push your page 4-28. accelerator pedal about halfway down. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t • Going about 29 mph (47 km/h) or more, push your connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already accelerator pedal all the way down. moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

2-21 SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than Overdrive Off DRIVE (D) but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as Your automatic transaxle you go down steep mountain roads, but then you has an O/D (overdrive off) would also want to use your brakes off and on. button. It is located on LOW (L): This position gives you even more power the left side of the than SECOND (2) but lower fuel economy. You can use shift lever. it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle won’t shift into low gear until the vehicle is going slow enough. Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This Press the O/D button to turn off overdrive. A light on the could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your instrument panel cluster will come on when this brakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. feature is used. Press the button again to turn overdrive back on. Then the light on the instrument panel cluster will go off. See Overdrive Off Light on page 3-39. Use this feature for better fuel economy. Fast starts use the most fuel while gradual starts give you the best fuel economy. When you turn on your vehicle the overdrive will automatically be on until you turn it off.

2-22 Manual Transaxle Operation THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way Five-Speed you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. First (1): Press the clutch To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the pedal and shift into brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press FIRST (1). Then, slowly let the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to up on the clutch pedal neutral. as you press the accelerator pedal. Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle your engine. REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

Five-Speed Transaxle Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after your Shift Pattern vehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete warranty. stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brake shift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the for parking your vehicle. clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1). SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

2-23 Six-Speed You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete FIRST (1): Press the clutch stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the pedal and shift into shift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the FIRST (1). Then, slowly let clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1). up on the clutch pedal as you press the SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on accelerator pedal. the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2), put the shift lever in neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into SECOND (2).

Six-Speed Transaxle Shift Pattern

2-24 THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and upshift into REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the clutch THIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the you press the accelerator pedal. clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5), SIXTH (6): Shift into Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after your FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same vehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) while way you do for THIRD (3). Slowly let up on the your vehicle is moving could damage your clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking brake the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to for parking your vehicle. There is an audible beep when neutral. the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) to ensure that FIRST (1) gear and REVERSE (R) are not confused. Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle your engine.

2-25 Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift.

This chart shows when to shift to the next gear for the best fuel economy.

Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds

Engine 1to2or 2to3or 3to4or 4to5or 5to6or 2to1 3to2 4to3 5to4 6to5 1.8 L 15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph (Code 8) (24 km/h) (40 km/h) 64 km/h) (72 mph) — 15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph 50 mph 1.8 L (Code L) (24 km/h) (40 km/h) (64 km/h) (72 km/h) (80 km/h) If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good performance.

2-26 Parking Brake To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down the release button. Hold the release button in as you and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is move the lever all the way down. on, the brake system warning light will come on. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle. If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34.

2-27 Shifting Into Park (P) 3. Hold in the button on the shift lever.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a • Push the lever all the way toward the front of the trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. If you have an automatic transaxle do the following: 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your set the parking brake by pulling up on the parking vehicle is in PARK (P). brake lever. 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) as follows:

2-28 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave your automatic transaxle vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in Running PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see {CAUTION: if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running.

2-29 Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park (P) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle it has an automatic transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking to fully apply your regular brakes before you can pawl in the transaxle. You may ﬁnd it difficult to pull the shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-20. lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the the driver’s seat. To ﬁnd out how, see Shifting Into Park shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) (P) on page 2-28. and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of the shift lever into the gear you wish. PARK (P)before you release the parking brake. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-30 If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift Parking Your Vehicle out of PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Make sure the parking Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever brake is applied. into REVERSE (R), and ﬁrmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into 2. Carefully pry the REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can shift-lock override turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and small, round cover from release the clutch. the ﬂoor-shift console, located to the right If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on of the shift lever. page 4-34.

3. Insert the end of a flat-tipped tool into the circular slot and press down firmly. 4. While maintaining brake application, move the shift lever into the drive gear you want. 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

2-31 Parking Over Things That Burn {CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.

2-32 Engine Exhaust CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: • Repairs weren’t done correctly. • Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modiﬁed improperly. Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. your vehicle: • Drive it only with all the windows down to You might have exhaust coming in if: blow out any CO; and • Your exhaust system sounds strange or • Have your vehicle ﬁxed immediately. different. • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. • Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. CAUTION: (Continued)

2-33 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked {CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can {CAUTION: roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move Idling the engine with the climate control suddenly. You or others could be injured. system off could allow dangerous exhaust into To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under when you’re on fairly level ground, always set “Engine Exhaust.” your parking brake and move the shift lever to Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly PARK (P). carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t One place this can happen is a garage. move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer, running. also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See “Winter Driving” in the Index.

2-34 Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror The inside rearview mirror is attached to your vehicle’s front windshield glass. If you do not have a sunroof, your vehicle’s inside rearview mirror may be equipped with reading lamps. If your vehicle is equipped with this mirror, there are two buttons located on the bottom of the mirror. Press the buttons to turn the lamps on and press them again to turn the lamps off. The mirror moves so that you can adjust it up and down To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps will or side to side. You can adjust the mirror for day or automatically turn off when the key is in the ACC night driving. Pull the tab for night driving to reduce or LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20 glare. Push the tab for daytime driving. minutes or more. The lights will come on when any of the doors are opened or if the key is turned to the ON position.

2-35 Outside Remote Control Mirrors Outside Convex Mirror

These controls are located Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex to the left of your steering mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the wheel on the instrument driver’s seat. panel. {CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. To adjust either mirror, push the button labeled L (left) or R (right). Then use the arrows on the control pad to adjust the mirror. Once you have adjusted both mirrors, move the selector switch back to the center. This prevents moving the mirrors accidentally once you have adjusted them.

2-36 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area A storage area is located in the console between the Glove Box seats which can hold CDs, cassettes or a cell phone. There is also an accessory power outlet located in To open the glove box door, lift the latch. Always keep the storage area. the glove box door closed while driving. To access the upper tray of the storage area, raise the console box lid without touching the lock release Cupholder(s) lever. To access the lower storage area, pull up the lock release lever while raising the lid. There are two fixed cupholders located in the console area between the two front seats. There are also two cupholders that fold out of the rear of the console Floor Mats storage unit. Your vehicle’s floor mat is specially designed to remain in position under your feet and out of reach of the Coinholder(s) accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two locator hooks. Your instrument panel has a coinholder located to the left of the steering wheel. Be sure the driver’s side floor mat is properly placed on the floor so that it does not block the movement of Instrument Panel Storage Area the accelerator pedal. There are storage compartments located on the instrument panel in two places. They are below the interior/instrument panel brightness dial and below the shift lever. Pull the top of the door toward you to open it or for the compartment below the shift lever, push the button to open it.

2-37 How to Remove and Replace Luggage Carrier the Floor Mat To remove the floor mat, {CAUTION: pull up on the rear of the mat to disconnect it from the locator hooks. If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress and so forth — the wind can catch it as you drive along. This can cause you to lose control. What you are carrying could be violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry something like this inside. But, never carry something longer or wider than the luggage To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings in the floor mat over the locator hooks and push down carrier on top of your vehicle. into place. The luggage carrier has sliding crossrails and side rails that are attached to the roof to secure cargo. Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment. These are available through your GM dealer.

2-38 Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than 75 lbs. (34 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle. When you carry large things, never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle. When loading cargo, be sure it rests on the crossrails and does not scratch or damage the vehicle. Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main weight as far forward as you can and move the rear crossrail as far forward as possible to keep the load from shifting. To adjust the position of the crossrails, do the following: Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when 1. Turn the eight knobs counterclockwise to loosen loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle the crossrails. capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on 2. Slide the crossrails to the desired position for page 4-32. loading the luggage. To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, 3. After adjusting the crossrails, be sure to tighten all check now and then to make sure the luggage the knobs by turning the knobs clockwise. carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.

2-39 Rear Storage Area Rear Cargo Accessory Track A storage area is located under the rear cargo area System floor panel. Your vehicle has a track system located on the floor of Turn the two lock knobs on the rear cargo area. This system can be used to the floor panel to unlock carry accessories in your vehicle in many ways by using the storage area the tie-down anchors provided in your vehicle or access cover. accessory packages available from your dealer. Make sure the cargo being carried in the rear cargo area is secure. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

Be sure to lock the access cover to close it securely.

2-40 Cargo Cover Cargo Tie Downs To use the cargo cover, attach the side hooks of the cargo cover to the upper tie down hooks located along both sides of the rear cargo area.

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. If you remove the cover, always store it in the proper storage location. When you put it back, always be sure that it is securely reattached. The tire tie-down belts are designed to secure the ﬂat tire. You can also use the belts and hooks to secure your luggage. There are eight tie-down hooks located in the rear of the vehicle. The belts are located under the cargo area ﬂoor panel. To use the belts, hook the ends to the lower tie-down hooks in a criss-cross pattern across the cargo. Pull on the belts at the buckle to tighten the belt as needed.

2-41 Sunroof

To open the sunroof, press the SLIDE arrow that points to the rear of the vehicle. To close it, press the other If your vehicle has a sunroof, you can tilt or open it. To arrow that points to the front of the vehicle. The sunroof tilt the sunroof, slide the sunshade rearward, then will close partially and stop. Once the sunroof stops press the switch marked UP. Press the other end of the you will have to release the switch and press the button switch to lower the sunroof. Your ignition must be on again to completely close it. You can open the sunroof for the switch to work. to any position. The sunshade will open when the sunroof is opened.

2-42 Section 3 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...... 3-2 Brake System Warning Light ...... 3-31 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-4 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 3-32 Other Warning Devices ...... 3-4 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 3-33 Horn ...... 3-5 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 3-34 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-5 Oil Pressure Light ...... 3-38 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ...... 3-5 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-39 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-12 Overdrive Off Light ...... 3-39 Interior Lamps ...... 3-14 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ...... 3-39 Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-17 Door Ajar Light ...... 3-39 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ...... 3-18 Fuel Gage ...... 3-40 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ...... 3-19 Audio System(s) ...... 3-41 Climate Controls ...... 3-19 Setting the Time ...... 3-41 Climate Control System ...... 3-19 Radio with CD ...... 3-42 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-22 Radio with Six-Disc CD ...... 3-52 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...... 3-23 Navigation/Radio System ...... 3-63 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ...... 3-25 Understanding Radio Reception ...... 3-63 Instrument Panel Cluster ...... 3-26 Care of Your CDs ...... 3-64 Speedometer and Odometer ...... 3-27 Care of Your CD Player ...... 3-64 Tachometer ...... 3-28 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-64 Safety Belt Reminder Light ...... 3-28 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System Air Bag Readiness Light ...... 3-30 (United States Only) ...... 3-64 Charging System Light ...... 3-31

3-1 Instrument Panel Overview

3-2 The main components of your instrument panel are the M. Storage Compartment. See Instrument Panel following: Storage Area on page 2-37. A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22. N. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5. Cluster on page 3-26. O. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10. C. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard P. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-5. Warning Flashers on page 3-4. Q. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5. D. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-41. R. Cruise Control Lever (Option). See “Cruise Control” E. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5. Defogger” under Climate Control System on S. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-16. page 3-19. T. Windshield Wiper Lever. See “Windshield Wipers” F. Front Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light. See under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5. Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-28. U. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter G. Climate Control System. See Climate Control on page 3-19. System on page 3-19. V. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28. H. Power Remote Control Mirror Button. See Outside Remote Control Mirrors on page 2-36. W. Power Outlet. See Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current on page 3-18. I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See “Instrument Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps X. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27. on page 3-14. Y. Center Console Storage Area. See Center Console J. Rear Liftglass Release Button. See Liftgate/Liftglass Storage Area on page 2-37. on page 2-9. Z. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-37. K. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 2-37. L. Content Theft-Deterrent Security Light. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-13.

3-3 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning button is located on the center of the instrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work. Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front Other Warning Devices and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

3-4 Horn Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever To sound the horn, press anywhere on the horn pad on your steering wheel. Tilt Wheel A tilt steering column allows you to adjust the steering column before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The tilt lever is located underneath the steering wheel column. The turn signal/multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. This lever operates the following: • Turn and Lane-Change Signals • Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer • Flash-to-Pass For more information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-12.

To tilt the column, move the lever downward. Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable position, then move the lever upward to lock the column in place.

3-5 Turn and Lane-Change Signals Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer The turn signal has an upward (for right) and a The headlamps must be on for this feature to work. downward (for left) position. These positions allow you For high beams, push the turn signal lever away to signal a turn or a lane change. from you. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the high beams are When the turn is ﬁnished, the lever will return on, this light on the automatically. instrument panel cluster To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until also will be on. the arrow starts to ﬂash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will ﬂash in It will go off when you switch to the low beams. the direction of the To switch back to low beams, pull the lever turn or lane change. toward you. Flash-to-Pass With the lever in the low-beam position, pull the lever toward you to momentarily switch to high beams If you signal a turn or a lane change and notice the (to signal that you are going to pass). If you have the arrow ﬂashing rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out headlamps on when you release the lever, they will and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. return to the low beams. If a bulb is burned out, have it replaced to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-98.

3-6 Windshield Wipers LO (Low): Move the lever to LO for steady wiping at low speed. HI (High): Move the lever to HI for steady wiping at high speed. MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. REAR: To turn on the rear window wiper, twist the end of the lever upward. The wiper does not work with the rear liftglass open. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades The lever on the right side of the steering column before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, controls the windshield wipers and washer. carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. The available positions are the following: Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit OFF: The wipers are off. breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose a delayed wiping cycle. In light rain or snow, you might want to use this position rather than continuous wiping. You can change the time between wipes by turning the INT TIME band. Turn the band forward or rearward for longer or shorter delay interval.

3-7 Windshield Washer Cruise Control Pull the lever toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The spray will continue until you release the lever. The wipers will run a few times. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-39. To squirt washer fluid on the rear window, twist the knob upward and downward as far as it will go. The knob automatically returns from these positions after you release it. You can twist the lever downward to create a large flow of water on the rear window, then twist the lever back up to wipe the window. This feature is helpful to quickly clear the rear liftglass when very dirty. The cruise control lever is located on the right side of {CAUTION: the steering wheel.

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer ﬂuid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

3-8 With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of Setting Cruise Control 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 mph { (40 km/h). CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you’re {CAUTION: not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the Cruise control can be dangerous where • cruise control switch off until you want to use you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. cruise control. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. • Cruise control can be dangerous on 1. Press the ON-OFF button at the end of the cruise slippery roads. On such roads, fast control lever. The CRUISE light on the instrument changes in tire traction can cause panel cluster will come on. See Cruise Control Light needless wheel spinning, and you could on page 3-39 for more information. lose control. Don’t use cruise control on 2. Get up to the speed you want. slippery roads. 3. Move the lever down to SET/COAST and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

3-9 Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed Control and then you apply the brake. This will shut off cruise There are two ways to go to a higher speed: control. But you won’t need to reset it. • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher Unless you’re going less than 25 mph (40 km/h) you speed. Move the lever down to SET/COAST. can push the lever up to RES/ACC Release the lever and the accelerator pedal. You’ll (Resume/Accelerate). You’ll go right back up to your now cruise at the higher speed. chosen speed and stay there. • Move the cruise lever up to RES/ACC. Hold it there The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if the until you get up to the speed you want, and then vehicle speed goes below 25 mph (40 km/h). If your release the lever. preset speed cancels out at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h), there may be a problem with your vehicle’s • To increase your speed in very small amounts, cruise control. See your dealer. move the lever to RES/ACC brieﬂy and then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-10 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to Control a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake or downshifting to SECOND (2) or There are two ways to reduce your speed while using LOW (L) takes you out of cruise control. Many cruise control: drivers ﬁnd this to be too much trouble and don’t use • Push and hold the lever to SET/COAST until you cruise control on steep hills. reach the lower speed you want, then release it. Ending Cruise Control To slow down in very small amounts, push the lever • There are several ways to turn off the cruise control: down brieﬂy. Each time you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. • Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle. Passing Another Vehicle While Using • Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button again. Cruise Control • Pull the cruise control lever toward you. Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will Erasing Speed Memory slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your Using Cruise Control on Hills cruise control set speed memory is erased. The set speed memory is also erased when the vehicle speed is How well your cruise control will work on hills depends less than 25 mph (40 km/h). upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.

3-11 Exterior Lamps The exterior lamp switch has three positions: OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off all lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

O (Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to this position turns on the parking lamps together with the following: • Sidemarker Lamps • Taillamps • License Plate Lamp • Instrument Panel Lights 3 The lever on the left side of the steering column (Headlamps): Turning the switch to this position operates the exterior lamps. turns on the headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and lights. O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of the Turn the switch to OFF to turn off the lamps. lever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps. - (Fog Lamps): You can also use the control lever to turn on the fog lamps. They will come on only when the headlamps are on low beam.

3-12 Automatic Headlamp System Daytime Running Lamps Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic light sensor Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for on the top left corner of the instrument panel, so be others to see the front of your vehicle during the sure it is not covered or the headlamps will be on day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving continuously. conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short When it is dark enough outside, your automatic periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles headlamp system will turn on your low-beam headlamps ﬁrst sold in Canada. at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at instrument panel lights. The parking brake must be a reduced brightness when the following conditions released for the automatic headlamp system to work. are met: This is indicated by the headlamp symbol on your • The ignition is on with the engine running, instrument panel cluster. • the exterior lamps switch is off and If you are driving through a parking garage, overcast weather, or a tunnel, the automatic headlamp system • the parking brake is released. may turn on your low-beam headlamps at a normal When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on brightness along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker lamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel will be dimmer, and the instrument panel cluster lights won’t be lit up either. may dim. There will be a delay of several seconds before the lights will turn on when starting the car at night. When you turn the exterior lamp switch to the headlamp position, your DRL will go off and your headlamps will Headlamps On Reminder come on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. If you turn the ignition to LOCK or ACC and leave the lamps on, you’ll hear a tone when you open the driver’s door.

3-13 When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will Interior Lamps automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps. See “Automatic Headlamp System” earlier in this section. Instrument Panel Brightness When you turn the exterior lamp switch off, the regular lamps will go off and your headlamps will change to the The instrument panel reduced brightness of DRL provided it is not dark brightness control is outside. DRL also comes on if only the parking lamps located to the left of the are being used. steering wheel on the To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, do the following: instrument panel. 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Turn the ignition back on. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.

3-14 The brightness of the instrument panel lights will Entry Lighting decrease when the headlamps are on. It is recommended that the brightness level is kept at the maximum setting While the instrument panel brightness control is in the for all daytime driving to insure proper visibility. door position, the light will come on when any side door, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. After all the side The interior light has the following positions: doors, liftgate and liftglass are closed, and the key is out OFF: This position turns the light off. of the ignition, in LOCK or ACC, the light will remain on for about 15 seconds and then go out except under ON: This position keeps the light on all the time. the following conditions: The ignition is turned to ACC or ON after all the side 6 (Door): This position turns the light on when any • doors, the liftgate and the liftglass are closed. of the side doors, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. The light goes off when all the side doors, the liftgate • All the side doors and liftgate are locked when the and the liftglass are closed. liftglass is closed and the light is still on. When any side door is unlocked with the key or remote keyless entry system transmitter, the light comes on for 15 seconds, even if the door is not opened. To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps will automatically turn off when the key is in the ACC or LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20 minutes or more.

3-15 Reading Lamp

If you do not have a sunroof, your vehicle’s inside rearview mirror may be equipped with reading lamps. If your vehicle is equipped with reading lamps, there are two buttons located on the bottom of the mirror. Press the buttons to turn the lamps on and press them again to If you have a sunroof, you will have a reading lamp turn the lamps off. near the sunroof switch. Press the button to turn To prevent the battery from draining, the lamps will the lamp on and press it again to turn it off. automatically turn off when the key is in the ACC or LOCK positions or if the key is removed for 20 minutes or more. The lights will come on when any of the doors are opened or if the key is turned to the ON position.

3-16 Accessory Power Outlets Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by auxiliary electrical equipment. your warranty. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment, and never use anything The accessory power outlet is located in the center that exceeds the amperage rating. console storage area. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the To use the outlet, the ignition must be in ON or ACC. proper installation instructions included with the Pull down the small cover to access the outlet. equipment. Notice: When using an accessory power outlet, Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory maximum electrical load must not exceed 15 amps. plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory Always turn off any electrical equipment when or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for the power outlet can cause damage not covered extended periods will drain your battery. by your warranty. These circuits are protected by a fuse and have maximum current levels. Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the power accessory outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the power accessory plugs.

3-17 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating The power outlet is located near the center of the instrument panel. Before using the outlet, turn on the Current ignition and press the button next to the outlet. An indicator light in the button will come on. After using With this power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary electrical the outlet, press the button again to turn it off. equipment with a maximum limit of 115 VAC. If you try to use equipment that requires more than the limit, a The power outlet is not designed for the following protection circuit will cut the power supply. The power electrical equipment and they may not work properly: will automatically restart when equipment that operates • Equipment with high initial peak wattage: within the limit is plugged in. cathode-ray tube type televisions, compressor-driven refrigerators, electric power tools. • Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

3-18 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smoking Climate Control System materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire. With this system you can control the heating, cooling To use the lighter, push the lighter in all the way and ventilation for your vehicle. and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself. If the engine is not running, the key must be in ACC to use the lighter. It is not recommended to use the cigarette lighter to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Use the accessory power outlet for phones and other electrical equipment. See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-17 or Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current on page 3-18. Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your Operation hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s 9 (Fan): Turn the center knob away from OFF to turn ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the the system on. Turn the knob toward HI to increase lighter and the heating element. fan speed. Your vehicle has a removable ashtray that sits in your If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest front cupholder in the center console storage area. setting, the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced. For more information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-23 and Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-7.

3-19 To change the current mode, select one of the following: A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button, located in the center of the instrument panel to the left of the audio H (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper system, to turn the air-conditioning system on or off. instrument panel outlets. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the air conditioning is ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs the air to the upper activated. instrument panel outlets, and to the ﬂoor outlets. On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air 6(Floor): This mode directs the air to the ﬂoor outlets escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time and to the outboard outlets (for the side windows). it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. ? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside For quick cool down on hot days: air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to 1. Select the vent mode. help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. 2. Select the recirculation mode. Press this button, located in the center of the instrument 3. Select A/C. panel to the left of the audio system, to turn the recirculation mode on or off. When the button is pressed, 4. Select the coolest temperature. an indicator light in the button will come on. Press the 5. Select the highest fan speed. button again to turn off recirculate and to circulate outside air through the system. The indicator light will The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the go off. Recirculate is automatically turned off when air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of the climate control system mode knob is turned to defog water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or defrost or is between modes. or after turning off the engine. This is normal. Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

3-20 Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to clear (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This fog from the rear window. can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost The rear window defogger from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear button is located on the the windows of fog or moisture and warm the center of the instrument passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or panel, above the audio frost from the windshield more quickly. system. The defogger does not operate with the rear - (Defog): This mode directs the air between the liftglass opened. windshield, side windows, instrument panel outlets and the ﬂoor outlets. The air-conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting without pressing A/C, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. 1 The rear window defogger will only work when the (Defrost): This mode directs the air to the ignition is in ON. windshield, instrument panel outlets and the side windows. The air-conditioning compressor will run =(Rear Defogger): Press the defogger button to turn automatically in this setting without pressing A/C, unless the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light the outside temperature is at or below freezing. in the button will come on to let your know that the rear Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. window defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.

3-21 The rear window defogger will turn off automatically Operation Tips approximately 15 minutes after the button is pressed. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing • Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air the button again or by turning off the engine. inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle. Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you • Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the adversely affect the performance of the system. repairs would not be covered by your warranty. • Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more decal or anything similar to the defogger grid. effectively. Outlet Adjustment • If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced. For more information, Use the air outlets located see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter” following in the center and outboard and Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on sides of the instrument page 6-7. panel, to change the direction of the air flowing through the vents.

3-22 Passenger Compartment Air Filter The access panel for the air filter is behind the glove box. To replace the filter, follow these steps: Passenger compartment air, both outside and recirculated air, is routed through a passenger compartment air filter. The filter removes certain contaminants from the air, including pollen and dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be replaced early. An air filter is available through your dealer. For how often to change the air filter, see Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-7.

1. Lower the glove box door and remove the screw on the right side of the glovebox with a tool. Slide the arm of the glovebox off. 2. Push each side of the glovebox in and pull toward you.

3-23 3. Lift the snaps on the filter cover to remove 4. Remove the air filter. the cover. 5. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter. If you choose not to replace the air filter after removing it, using your vehicle without a filter won’t cause damage.

3-24 Warning Lights, Gages and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages Indicators and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on locate them. when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you Warning lights and gages can signal that something is what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause Waiting to do repairs can be costly- and even dangerous. an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to So please get to know your warning lights and gages. your warning lights and gages could also save you They’re a big help. or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on brieﬂy when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

3-25 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel is left in the tank and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.

United States Cluster Shown, Canada Similar

3-26 Speedometer and Odometer Trip Odometers Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both The trip odometers can tell you how far your vehicle has miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in miles. The button located on the right side of the instrument You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a panel cluster allows you new odometer installed. to switch between the If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer and the two trip odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set odometers. at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.

Press the button once to switch to TRIP A and again to switch to TRIP B. To return the display to the odometer reading, press the trip odometer button again. To set the trip odometers to zero, press and hold the knob on the right side of the instrument panel.

3-27 Tachometer Safety Belt Reminder Light

The tachometer shows When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will engine speed in come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten thousands of revolutions their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is per minute (rpm). already buckled. The safety belt light will also ﬂash until the driver’s belt is buckled. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

Notice: Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur. Temperature Display The outside air temperature is displayed on the center of the instrument panel, within the speedometer. The display will show the outside air temperature in Fahrenheit with a range from -22°F to 122° F (−30°C to 50°C).

3-28 Your vehicle also has a safety belt reminder light for the When the key is turned to ON or START, this light will right front passenger position. come on as a reminder for the right front passenger to fasten the safety belt. The safety belt light will ﬂash This light is located on the until the right front passenger’s safety belt is buckled. center of the instrument The passenger’s safety belt reminder light will not panel, above the audio illuminate if the right front passenger’s belt is already system. buckled or if a sensor does not detect the weight of a passenger in that seat. If something is placed on the right front passenger’s seat, the sensors in the seat may detect that object and cause the right front passenger’s safety belt reminder light to come on. If this ever happens, move the object to the rear seat or place it in a rear storage area, if at all possible.

3-29 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument {CAUTION: panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. If the air bag readiness light stays on or keeps The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. flashing after you start your vehicle, it means The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air the air bag system and safety belt pretension bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. system may not be working properly. The air For more information on the air bag system, see Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) on page 1-47. bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. This light will come on for To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have about seven seconds your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag when you start your readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle. Then the light vehicle. should go out. This means the system is ready. The air bag readiness light should come on for about seven seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the be ready to warn you if there is a problem. vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

3-30 Charging System Light Brake System Warning Light

This light will come on Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two brieﬂy when you turn on the parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still ignition, but the engine is work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need not running, as a check to both parts working well. show you it is working. If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Then it should go out when Have your brake system inspected right away. the engine starts.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system. It could indicate that you have a loose generator drive belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with the charging United States Canada system light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this light should come on when you turn the key to START. If it doesn’t come on then, have it ﬁxed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

3-31 If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the Anti-Lock Brake System Warning road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the Light ﬂoor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32 and Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-30.

{CAUTION:

United States Canada Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is With the anti-lock brake system, the light will come on on. Driving with the brake system warning light when your engine is started and may stay on for several on can lead to an accident. If the light is still seconds. That’s normal. on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

3-32 If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the Engine Coolant Temperature Gage light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-31. The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on brieﬂy when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it ﬁxed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. United States Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot! It means that your engine has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.

3-33 Malfunction Indicator Lamp This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to Check Engine Light assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. United States Canada Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which may not work as well, your fuel economy may not monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission be as good and your engine may not run as control systems. smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

3-34 Notice: Modifications made to the engine, If the Light Is Flashing transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or replacement tires that do not match your The following may prevent more serious damage to vehicle’s original tires can affect your vehicle’s your vehicle: emission controls and may cause this light to come • Reducing vehicle speed. on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. • Avoiding hard accelerations. This may also result in a failure to pass a required • Avoiding steep uphill grades. Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. • If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of This light should come on, as a check to show you it is cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see repaired. This light will also come on during a “If the Light Is On Steady” following. malfunction in one of two ways: If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart and may damage the emission control system on the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still required. flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. • Light On Steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.

3-35 If the Light Is On Steady If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will You also may be able to correct the emission system cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. malfunction by considering the following: You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? when you put the vehicle into gear, misﬁring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The This will be detected by the system and cause the diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has light to turn on. been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the If you experience one or more of these conditions, atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least properly installed should turn the light off. one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to ﬁx any will usually be corrected when the electrical system mechanical or electrical problems that may have dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. developed. Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

3-36 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical Programs emission control systems have not been completely Some state/provincial and local governments have or diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be may begin programs to inspect the emission control considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this you have recently replaced your battery or if your inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle battery has run down. The diagnostic system is registration. designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days Here are some things you need to know to help your of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle vehicle pass an inspection: still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the Engine light is on or not working properly. vehicle for inspection.

3-37 Oil Pressure Light • Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, the light may blink on and off. This is normal. If you have a problem with • If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for your oil, this light may stay a moment. This is normal. on after you start your engine or come on when you are driving. {CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that This indicates that there is not enough oil pressure to it catches fire. You or others could be burned. keep your engine properly lubricated and cool. Check your oil as soon as possible and have The engine could be low on oil, or have some other oil your vehicle serviced. related problem. Have it fixed right away. The oil light could also come on in three other situations. Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil • When the ignition is on but the engine is not problems can be costly and is not covered by running, the light will come on as a test to show you your warranty. it is working, but the light will go out when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

3-38 Cruise Control Light Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

The CRUISE light appears This light will come on whenever you use the when your windshield ON-OFF button to set your washer ﬂuid is low cruise control. See (Canada Only). “Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

Door Ajar Light Overdrive Off Light This light will come on if Your automatic transaxle any door, the rear liftgate has overdrive. The light or the rear liftglass are will come on whenever you not completely closed. turn off the overdrive. See “Overdrive Off” under Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-20.

3-39 Fuel Gage Here are five things some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage. • At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads F or full. • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill it. • It takes the gage several minutes to read F or full after filling the vehicle with fuel. • The gage moves a little when you turn, stop or speed up. • The gage doesn’t go back to E or empty when you United States Canada turn off the ignition. Your fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in your tank. There is an arrow on the fuel gage that indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle. The fuel gage works only when the ignition switch is ON. When the gage first indicates E or empty, you still have a little fuel left, about 1 or 2 gallons (3.8 L or 7.6 L), but you need to get more right away. When your vehicle is low on fuel the low fuel warning light, located below the empty mark, will also come on to remind you to add fuel.

3-40 Audio System(s) Setting the Time Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can minutes. add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour do it properly. Added sound equipment may appears on the display. AM will also appear for morning interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, hours. Press and hold the minute button until the radio or other systems, and even damage them. correct minute appears on the display. The time may be Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the set with the ignition on or off. operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and So, before adding sound equipment, check with hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until your dealer and be sure to check federal rules UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not covering mobile radio and telephone units. available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on Your audio system has been designed to operate easily the display. and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it ﬁrst. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle, ﬁnd out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

3-41 Radio with CD This system relies upon receiving speciﬁc information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and the name of the program being broadcast. XM™ Radio Satellite Service Your radio has a blinking red light that is used as a (USA Only) theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever your XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service ignition is off. that offers 100 coast to coast channels including Radio Data System (RDS) music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information, Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data including song title and artist name. A service fee is System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or With RDS, your radio can do the following: call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming • Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies • Display messages from radio stations • Seek to stations with traffic announcements 3-42 Playing the Radio Finding a Station

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, and off. AM, or XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The display will show your selection. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume. TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): This button is w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to inoperable on this radio. the next or to the previous station and stay there. RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display The radio will seek only to stations that are in the between the radio station frequency and the time. selected band and only to those with a strong signal. Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the time. w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), push this button for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play of information related to the current song or channel: for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning. Number/Channel Name. To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the To change the default on the display, push the knob SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN until you see the display you want, then hold the knob and the preset number appear on the display. You until the display ﬂashes. The selected display will will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the ﬁrst now be the default. preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets. The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.

3-43 Setting Preset Stations Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLAT appears on the display will return all of the tone controls The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your to the middle position. favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized only, if equipped), by performing the following steps: bass, mid, and treble equalization settings. 1. Turn the radio on. You can set up to six customized equalization settings by performing the following steps: 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 1. Turn the radio on. 3. Tune in the desired station. 2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to create the desired equalization. 4. Press EQ to select the equalization. 3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you EQ symbol will ﬂash. press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return and the equalization that you 4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the selected will also be automatically selected for that desired EQ number. pushbutton. 5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. knob to store the equalization setting and the number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) appear on the display.

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID, 6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED numbers. indicator will light to show that the tone control can be EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone. decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

3-44 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) 4. If you want to go to another station within that category and the category is displayed, press BAL (Balance): Press and release this button until either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. the category and then to go to another station. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the 5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type mode. left or the right speakers. SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within FADE: Press and release this button until FADE a category by performing the following: appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. 1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will be Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the displayed on the screen. front or the rear speakers. 2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob. Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two 3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and seconds will return all speaker settings to the middle hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin position. scanning within your chosen category. 4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™) particular station. To select and ﬁnd a desired PTY perform the following: BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency 1. Press PROG TYPE. The PTY symbol will be allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the displayed on the screen. same programming. Press and hold BAND for two 2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob. seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger 3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the the category’s ﬁrst station. display. The radio will not switch to other stations. This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio Service.

3-45 Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) RDS Messages

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies. favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have When an alert announcement comes on the current factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will (six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted 1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2. or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player is playing, play will stop during the announcement. 2. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. 3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered broadcast system. This feature is not supported by pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you all RDS stations. press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return, if program type select mode INFO (Information): If the current station has a is activated. message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. The message may display 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message at your own speed, press the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on the display with each press. Once the complete message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to.

3-46 TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed station that supports traffic announcements. If no station around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. on the tuned radio station you will hear it. Your radio will also interrupt the play of a cassette tape or If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements, press this button and the radio announcements and the brackets are displayed. will seek to a station that does. When the radio ﬁnds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. When Service. a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio Radio Messages station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. CALIBRATE: Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears on the display, it means that your radio has not been conﬁgured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service.

3-47 XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Condition Action Required Message XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). indicates content with explicit language. Updating Updating encryption The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and code no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and (after 4 second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly. CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another channel. CH Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. available Tune to another station. If this station was one of your presets, you may need to choose another station for that preset button. No Info Artist Name/Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this available channel. Your system is working properly. No Info Song/Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this available channel. Your system is working properly.

3-48 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Condition Action Required Message No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel. Your system is working properly. No Info No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this message available time on this channel. Your system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you the chosen category selected. Your system is working properly. XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the servicing facility. Radio ID Radio ID label If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message (channel 0) alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate your service. Unknown Radio ID not known If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, (should only be if you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer. hardware failure) Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail location.

3-49 Playing a Compact Disc Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc. With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot, If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc Messages” later in this section. should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when \1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to the ignition is off, ﬁrst press the eject symbol or push the RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a the ignition on, it will start to play. reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The display will show elapsed time. When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the be activated each time you play a CD. tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM and the track number will appear on the display. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. 4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton The integral CD player can play the smaller 8cm single to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner. The display will show elapsed time. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality customized equalization setting while playing a compact of the music that has been recorded, and the way the disc. The equalization will be automatically set CD-R has been handled. You may experience an whenever you play a compact disc. See “EQ” listed increase in skipping, difficulty in ﬁnding tracks, and/or previously for more information. difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD. w SEEK x: Press the down arrow while playing a Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught CD to go to the start of the current track if more in the CD player. than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.

3-50 w SCAN x: Press and hold one of the arrows for Compact Disc Messages more than two seconds until SCAN and the track number appear on the display and you hear a beep. CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds, display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of then go on to the next track. Press this button again the following reasons: to stop scanning. • You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long the becomes smoother, the disc should play. current track has been playing. To change the default on • The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. the display (track and elapsed time), push the knob The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and until you see the display you want, then hold the knob • until the display ﬂashes. The selected display will try again. now be the default. While elapsed time is showing, CD • There may have been a problem while burning TIME will appear on the display. the CD. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a • The label may be caught in the CD player. CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, inside the radio for future listening. try a known good CD. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not be compact disc when listening to the radio. CD will appear corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays on the display when a compact disc is loaded. an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed ﬁrst.

3-51 Radio with Six-Disc CD AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a feature called automatic volume. With this feature, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic volume, select OFF. RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display Your radio has a blinking red light that is used as a between the radio station frequency and the time. theft-deterrent feature. The light will blink whenever your Pressing this knob with the ignition off will display ignition is off. the time. Playing the Radio To change the default on the display, press the knob until you see the display you want, then hold the PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on knob until the display ﬂashes. The selected display will and off. now be the default. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease volume.

3-52 Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your or AM. The display will show your selection. favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps: TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations. 1. Turn the radio on. sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM. the next or to the previous station and stay there. 3. Tune in the desired station. The radio will seek only to stations that are in the 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization. selected band and only to those with a strong signal. 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station for two seconds until SC appears on the display and you set will return and the equalization that you you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for selected will also be automatically selected for that a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press pushbutton. either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets. The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.

3-53 Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, or AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the want to decrease the treble. sound toward the left or the right speakers. To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the and adjust the display level to zero. front or the rear speakers. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone position, select balance or fade and push and hold the or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. adjust the display level to the middle position. AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle to choose between bass, midrange and treble position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk, speaker controls are displayed. The radio will produce pop, rock, and classical program types. one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass, midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.

3-54 Radio Data System (RDS) Finding a PTY Station Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only 1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. With RDS, your radio can do the following: 2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of 3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either programming SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to • Receive announcements concerning local and the category’s first station. national emergencies 4. If you want to go to another station within that • Display messages from radio stations category and the category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not • Seek to stations with traffic announcements displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display This system relies upon receiving specific information the category and then to go to another station. from these stations and will only work when the 5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go information is available. In rare cases, a radio station back to Step 1. may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search contact the radio station. for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements. While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY time of day, a program type (PTY) for current you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk programming, and the name of the program being will appear beside that PTY on the display. You broadcast. may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS station will interrupt play if that selected program type format is broadcast.

3-55 SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) a category by performing the following: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your 1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have selected PTY will be displayed on the screen. factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs 2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. (six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: 3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and 1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2. hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin 2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type scanning within your chosen category. select mode. 4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a 3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. particular station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you same program type. Press and hold BAND for two set will return. seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two RDS Messages seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on When an alert announcement comes on the current again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will be turned on. hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player is playing, play will stop during the announcement. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations.

3-56 INFO (Information): If the current station has a If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets button to see the message. The message may display or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc. station that supports traffic announcements. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display. If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if the message at your own speed, press the INFO button volume is muted or interrupt the play of a CD if the last repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and the the display with each press. Once the complete brackets are displayed. message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. Playing a Compact Disc The old message can be displayed by pressing The integral CD player can play the smaller 8cm single the INFO button until a new message is received or a discs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discs different station is tuned to. and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner. TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned of the music that has been recorded, and the way the station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed CD-R has been handled. You may experience an around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes increase in skipping, difficulty in ﬁnding tracks, and/or on the tuned radio station you will hear it. difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic try a know good CD. announcements, press this button and the radio Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught will seek to a station that does. When the radio ﬁnds a in the CD player. station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc. stop and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO Messages” later in this section. TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

3-57 LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label disc player will hold up to six discs. side up. The player will pull the disc in. Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing To insert one disc, do the following: again. Once the light stops flashing and turns 1. Turn the ignition on. green you can load another disc. The disc player 2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more button. than six. 3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to To load more than one disc but less than six, complete turn green. Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of 4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The label side up. The player will pull the disc in. radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc. number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated automatically. each time you play a disc. To insert multiple discs, do the following: If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically. 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD As each new track starts to play, the track number will button for two seconds. appear on the display. You will hear a beep and the light, located to the right of the slot, will begin to flash.

3-58 Playing a Specific Loaded Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried Compact Disc to push it in manually. The receiver’s 25-second eject For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio timer will reset at each press of eject, which will cause the display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX receiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second time button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered period has elapsed. pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR knob off and is playing, and the track number will appear. then on again. This will clear the disc-sensing feature and If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact enable discs to be loaded into the player again. Disc Messages” later in this section. { REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to LOAD CD Z (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs. reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. To eject the disc that is currently playing, press The display will show elapsed time. and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a disc is being ejected. reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The display will show elapsed time. REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver. or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following: If you try to push the disc back into the receiver, • To repeat the track you are listening to, press and before the 25 second time period is complete, the release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc display. Press RPT again to turn it off. several times before stopping. • To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off.

3-59 RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the sSCAN t: To scan one disc, press and hold either tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this of the following: feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the • To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display. random order, press and release the RDM button. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN RDM again to turn it off. arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN • To play the tracks on all of the discs that are appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this loaded in random order, press and hold RDM feature to listen to 10 seconds of the ﬁrst tracks of each for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop and RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press scanning. RDM again to turn it off. RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ current track has been playing. To change the default to select the desired equalization setting while playing on the display (track and elapsed time), press the knob a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically until you see the display you want, then hold the set whenever you play a compact disc. For more knob until the display ﬂashes. The selected display will information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed now be the default. previously in this section. BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the start of disc(s) is in the player. the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you press the button more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.

3-60 Using Song List Mode If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST FULL will appear on the display. The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. selections. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the the order that they were saved. following steps: You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK 1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this return you to the first saved track. section for more information. To delete tracks from the song list, perform the 2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song following steps: list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST 1. Turn the CD player on. button to turn it off. 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. 3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered S-LIST will appear on the display. pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right 3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired arrow button to locate the track that you want track to be deleted. to save. The track will begin to play. 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep more seconds to save the track into memory. will be heard immediately. After two seconds When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously, immediately. After two seconds of pressing two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to been deleted. confirm that the track has been saved. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

3-61 After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are Compact Disc Messages moved up the list. When another track is added to the song list, the track will be added to the end of the list. CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio To delete the entire song list, perform the following display, it could be due to one of the following reasons: steps: • You’re driving on a very rough road. When the 1. Turn the CD player on. road becomes smoother, the disc should play. 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. • The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. S-LIST will appear on the display. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and 3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more try again. than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed • There may have been a problem while burning by two beeps after two seconds and a ﬁnal beep will the CD. be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating that the song • The label may be caught in the CD player. list has been deleted. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved try a known good CD. tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not be deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays list again are added to the bottom of the list. an error message, write it down and provide it to your To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button. dealer when reporting the problem. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from the display.

3-62 Navigation/Radio System Your vehicle may have an AM-FM navigation radio system that includes a Radio Data System (RDS) with program type selections (PTY) that will seek out the kind of music you want to listen to. The radio system can also communicate with your navigation system to broadcast announcements on traffic and emergency alert communications. For information on how to use this system, see the “Navigation/Radio System” supplement. Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. FM Stereo Navigation/Radio Display and Controls FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals The display screen is located in the center of the will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). instrument panel. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.

3-63 XM™ Satellite Radio Service Fixed Mast Antenna (USA Only) The ﬁxed mast antenna can withstand most car washes XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception without being damaged. If the mast should ever from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, the sound to come and go. Your radio may display you should replace it. NO SIGNAL to indicate interference. Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened to the antenna base located on the roof of the vehicle. Care of Your CDs If tightening is required, tighten by hand. Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen System (United States Only) a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of Be sure never to touch the side without writing when snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. The performance of your XM™ system may be affected if your sunroof is open. Care of Your CD Player Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of your XM™ system. Make The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to sure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed. the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-64 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ...... 4-2 Freeway Driving ...... 4-20 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ...... 4-21 Drunken Driving ...... 4-2 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-22 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-22 Braking ...... 4-6 Winter Driving ...... 4-24 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ...... 4-9 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice Steering ...... 4-9 or Snow ...... 4-28 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-12 Towing ...... 4-30 Passing ...... 4-12 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 4-30 Loss of Control ...... 4-14 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...... 4-30 Driving at Night ...... 4-15 Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ...... 4-16 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-34 City Driving ...... 4-19

4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and the ﬂoor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting Your Vehicle injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save Defensive Driving your life. The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Drunken Driving Please start with a very important safety device in your Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor Everyone on page 1-8. to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” every year. On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a “always expect the unexpected.” vehicle: Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to • Judgment be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. • Muscular Coordination Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of • Vision accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following • Attentiveness. distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when Police records show that almost half of all motor the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, suddenly. these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been the driving task. Anything that distracts from the associated with the use of alcohol, with more than driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular 300,000 people injured. telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on

4-2 Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka. it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: • The amount of alcohol consumed • The drinker’s body weight • The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking • The length of time it has taken the drinker to It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if consume the alcohol. the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) who consumes food just before or during drinking will bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC have a somewhat lower BAC level. of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

4-3 There is a gender difference, too. Women generally But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of have a lower relative percentage of body water 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All level than a man of her same body weight will when drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. each has the same number of drinks. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! States is 0.04 percent. The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need and how quickly the person drinks them. to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

4-4 There is something else about drinking and driving that Control of a Vehicle many people do not know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash You have three systems that make your vehicle go injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has steering and the accelerator. All three systems have been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, to do their work at the places where the tires meet that person’s chance of being killed or permanently the road. disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reﬂexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.

4-5 Braking And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement Braking action involves perception time and or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire reaction time. tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in foot and do it. That is reaction time. spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool is only an average. It might be less with one driver between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much and as long as two or three seconds or more with faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving That means better braking and longer brake life. at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake enough space between your vehicle and others is normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do, important. the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

4-6 Anti-lock Brake System Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.

United States Canada

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light on the instrument panel will come on brieﬂy when you start your vehicle. When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what this test is going on, and you may even notice that happens with ABS: your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system, one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer the anti-lock brake system warning light will stay on. See will separately work the brakes at each front wheel Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-32. and at both rear wheels.

4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates faster than any driver could. The computer is on wheel speed and controls braking pressure programmed to make the most of available tire and road accordingly. conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you while braking hard. need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down ﬁrmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal.

4-8 Braking in Emergencies This will help you retain steering control. If you do have anti-lock, it is different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System” At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation in this section. that requires hard braking. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the even the very best braking. same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your ﬁrst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can not If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it system operates automatically without any action in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic. the vehicle as required. There may be a slight If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking engagement noise during hard use but this is normal. technique. This will give you maximum braking while maintaining steering control. You can do this by Steering pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure. Power Steering In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or If you lose power steering assist because the engine feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

4-9 Steering Tips where the tires meet the road. Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can Driving on Curves demand too much of those places. You can lose It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. control. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned The same thing can happen if you are steering through on the news happen on curves. a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two control systems — steering and acceleration — can Here is why: overwhelm those places where the tires meet the Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to road and make you lose control. the same laws of physics when driving on curves. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on The traction of the tires against the road surface makes the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you want it to go, and slow down. you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds will understand this. are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at If you need to reduce your speed as you approach which the curve is banked, and your speed. While a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you wheels are straight ahead. can control. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then systems — steering and braking — have to do their work accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-10 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and ﬁnd a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels. See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then An emergency like this requires close attention and a steer around the problem, to the left or right depending quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at on the space available. the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11 Off-Road Recovery Passing You may ﬁnd that your right wheels have dropped The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, you’re driving. accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: • “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the • Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of A broken center line usually indicates it is all the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go a double solid line, even if the road seems empty straight down the roadway. of approaching traffic.

4-12 • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to • Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one start your left lane change signal before moving out thing, following too closely reduces your area of of the right lane to pass. When you are far vision, especially if you are following a larger enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if in your inside mirror, activate your right lane the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. change signal and move back into the right lane. Keep back a reasonable distance. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close. Time your move so you will be • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on increasing speed as the time comes to move into two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you next vehicle. will have a “running start” that more than makes up • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. for the distance you would lose by dropping Even though the brake lamps are not ﬂashing, it back. And if something happens to cause you to may be slowing down or starting to turn. cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another • If you are being passed, make it easy for the opportunity. following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, you can ease a little to the right. wait your turn. But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.

4-13 Loss of Control If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want Let us review what driving experts say about what the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, happens when the three control systems (brakes, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction for a second skid if it occurs. where the tires meet the road to do what the driver Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, has asked. gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to and constantly seek an escape route or area of less these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery danger. surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. Skidding While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a care suited to existing conditions, and by not lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery possible. until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels down when you have any doubt. are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are to spin. no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

4-14 Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving. • Drive defensively. • Don’t drink and drive. • Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. • Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. • In remote areas, watch for animals. • If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be What you do in the daytime can also affect your impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright problems, or by fatigue. sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.

4-15 You can be temporarily blinded by approaching Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet aren’t even aware of it. road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-16 The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your Driving too fast through large water puddles or even windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy going through some car washes can cause problems, rain can make it harder to see road signs and too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you and even people walking. hit them. It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank ﬁlled with washer ﬂuid. Replace your windshield wiper {CAUTION: inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not separate from the inserts. work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

4-17 Hydroplaning Driving Through Flowing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and {CAUTION: you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if If you try to drive through flowing water, as you your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is be carried away. As little as six inches of standing on the road. If you can see reflections flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and If this happens, you and other vehicle raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be occupants could drown. Do not ignore police hydroplaning. warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There about trying to drive through flowing water. just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Driving Through Deep Standing Water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips • Besides slowing down, allow some extra following Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep distance. And be especially careful when you puddles or standing water, water can come in pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear through your engine’s air intake and badly damage room ahead, and be prepared to have your your engine. Never drive through water that is view restricted by road spray. slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water, • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires drive through them very slowly. on page 5-61.

4-18 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: • Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. • Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the next part, “Freeway Driving.” • Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

4-19 Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the Expect to move slightly slower at night. safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the The most important advice on freeway driving is: proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive same speed most of the other drivers are driving. on to the next exit. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

4-20 The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. Here are some things you can check before a trip: The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed • Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? according to your speedometer, not to your sense Are all windows clean inside and outside? of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? than you actually are. • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? Before Leaving on a Long Trip • Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you • Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, must start when you’re not fresh — such as after a day’s trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for work — don’t plan to make too many miles that first long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes recommended pressure? you can easily drive in. • Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it along your route? Should you delay your trip a serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs short time to avoid a major storm system? service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM • Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

4-21 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your driving in ﬂat or rolling terrain. instruments frequently. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re • If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make service or parking area and take a nap, get some your trips safer and more enjoyable. exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness • Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all ﬂuid on the highway as an emergency. levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.

4-22 • Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of CAUTION: (Continued) the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. They could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking { or even none going down a hill. You could CAUTION: crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. If you do not shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You • Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down would then have poor braking or even none to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down engine and transaxle, and you can climb the to let your engine assist your brakes on a hill better. steep downhill slope. • Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds {CAUTION: that let you stay in your own lane. • As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the an accident. ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have • You may see highway signs on mountains that to do all the work of slowing down. warn of special problems. Examples are long CAUTION: (Continued) grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-23 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. • You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

4-24 If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock, see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the most traction you can. Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can still steer. • Whatever your braking system, allow greater distance on any slippery road. What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold Watch for slippery spots. The road might be ﬁne until snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet • ice can be even more trouble because it may offer you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. crews can get there. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowing clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake or loose snow – drive with caution. before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

4-25 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, ﬂoor mats – anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: • Turn on your hazard ﬂashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-26 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little {CAUTION: faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and Snow can trap exhaust gases under your it keeps the battery charged. You will need a vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could heater run for a while. overcome you and kill you. You can not see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost vehicle. Clear away snow from around the all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine base of your vehicle, especially any that is again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help again from time to time to be sure snow does keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do not collect there. some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until Open a window just a little on the side of the help comes. vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

4-27 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the or Snow wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.” need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must see Tire Chains on page 5-75. use caution. Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will {CAUTION: clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or If you let your tires spin at high speed, they SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels can explode, and you or others could be as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal vehicle can overheat. That could cause an when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your engine compartment ﬁre or other damage. wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. as possible. Do not spin the wheels above If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery speedometer. hook. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-30.

4-28 Using the Recovery Hook

Your vehicle is equipped with a recovery hook. The {CAUTION: recovery hook is provided at the front of your vehicle. It can only be used for pulling your vehicle out. The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle. The hook could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. 4-29 Towing With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. Towing Your Vehicle Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing: Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See • What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), • How far will you tow? Some vehicles have see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. • Do you have the proper towing equipment? Recreational Vehicle Towing See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. • Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you The two most common types of recreational vehicle would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on page 4-21. the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

4-30 Dinghy Towing After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for more than three minutes before driving the vehicle. For front-wheel-drive vehicles with manual transaxles only do the following:

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs would not be When dinghy towing, be sure to follow the posted legal covered by your warranty. speed limit. Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all 1. Put the shift lever in neutral. four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of 2. Turn the ignition to ACC to avoid locking the its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain steering wheel. Make sure the audio system is components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if turned off and that nothing is plugged into the any of its wheels will be on the ground. power outlets. 3. Release the parking brake.

4-31 Dolly Towing Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground. Loading Your Vehicle

If your vehicle is a front-wheel drive vehicle it can be towed using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps: 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for automatic transaxles and in neutral for manual transaxles. 3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key. 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. 5. Release the parking brake.

4-32 This is an example of what your vehicle’s Tire-Loading Information/Certification label might look like. It is located in the glovebox and shows how much weight {CAUTION: your vehicle may properly carry. The label tells you the proper size, and recommended inflation pressures Things you put inside your vehicle can strike for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or information about the number of people that can be in a crash. in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight, • Put things in the rear area of your vehicle. and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all Try to spread the weight evenly. If you nonfactory-installed options. have fold-down rear seats, you’ll find four anchors on the back wall of your trunk. You can use these anchors to tie down { lighter loads. They’re not strong enough CAUTION: for heavy things, however, so put them as far forward as you can in the trunk or Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the rear area. GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can inside the vehicle so that some of them break, and it can change the way your vehicle are above the tops of the seats. handles. These could cause you to lose • Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in control and crash. Also, overloading can your vehicle. shorten the life of your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

4-33 Towing a Trailer Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that {CAUTION: appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means If you do not use the correct equipment and changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes drive properly, you can lose control when you correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, at all. You and your passengers could be important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of seriously injured. You may also damage your these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be you pull a trailer. covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, Ask your dealer for advice and information wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine about towing a trailer with your vehicle. is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

4-34 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer Weight of the Trailer If you do, here are some important points: How heavy can a trailer safely be? • There are many different laws, including speed limit It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg). restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure But even that can be too heavy. your rig will be legal, not only where you live It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside this information can be state or provincial police. temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull • Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend dealer about sway controls. on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. • Don’t tow a trailer at all during the ﬁrst 1,000 miles You can ask your dealer for our trailering information (1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your or advice, or you can write us at: engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center • Then, during the ﬁrst 500 miles (800 km) that you P.O. Box 33172 tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) Detroit, MI 48232-5172 and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your In Canada, write to: engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at General Motors of Canada Limited the heavier loads. Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 • Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts. Three important considerations have to do with weight: • the weight of the trailer, • the weight of the trailer tongue • and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-35 Weight of the Trailer Tongue If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight should weigh 10–15 percent of the total loaded to measure because it affects the total or gross weight trailer weight (B). of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will simply by moving some items around in the trailer. be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires on page 4-32 for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inﬂated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll ﬁnd these numbers on the Tire-Loading Information label located in the glovebox. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

4-36 Hitches Safety Chains It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. You should always attach chains between your vehicle Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to are some rules to follow: the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. • Don’t let the steel in a hitch contact the aluminum Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. on your bumper. If you do, the two will corrode. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching You can use something like paint or plastic tape to safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. separate the steel and aluminum. The same Always leave just enough slack so you can turn steel to aluminum problem can happen with with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on fasteners too. the ground. • Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If Trailer Brakes you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when Does your trailer have its own brakes? you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain page 2-33. Dirt and water can too. them properly. And, if you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both systems won’t work well, or at all.

4-37 Driving with a Trailer Passing Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as Backing Up responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Before you start, check the trailer hitch, platform and Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then have someone guide you. apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your Making Turns electrical connection at the same time. Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the could cause the trailer to come in contact with the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid brakes are still working. making very sharp turns while trailering. Following Distance When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in This can help you avoid situations that require advance. heavy braking and sudden turns.

4-38 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Parking on Hills When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument {CAUTION: panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also You really should not park your vehicle, with a flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes change lanes or stop. wrong, your rig could start to move. People When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument can be injured, and both your vehicle and the panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer trailer can be damaged. are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s bulbs are still working. how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into Driving On Grades PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into gear for Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start a manual transaxle, yet. When parking uphill, turn down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift your wheels away from the curb. When parking down, you might have to use your brakes so much that downhill, turn your wheels into the curb. they would get hot and no longer work well. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the 3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular possibility of the engine and the transaxle overheating. brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for a manual transaxle. 5. Release the regular brakes.

4-39 When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more while you: on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), • start your engine, engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system. • shift into a gear, and Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, • release the parking brake. it’s a good idea to review this information before you 2. Let up on the brake pedal. start your trip. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.

4-40 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Service ...... 5-3 Brakes ...... 5-40 Doing Your Own Service Work ...... 5-3 Battery ...... 5-44 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Jump Starting ...... 5-45 Your Vehicle ...... 5-4 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-51 Fuel ...... 5-4 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-52 Gasoline Octane ...... 5-4 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-52 Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Headlamps ...... 5-52 California Fuel ...... 5-5 Front Turn Signal Lamps ...... 5-54 Additives ...... 5-6 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...... 5-55 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...... 5-6 Rear Combination Lamps ...... 5-56 Filling Your Tank ...... 5-7 Back-Up Lamps ...... 5-58 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ...... 5-9 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-59 Checking Things Under the Hood ...... 5-10 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 5-60 Hood Release ...... 5-10 Engine Compartment Overview ...... 5-12 Tires ...... 5-61 Engine Oil ...... 5-16 Inﬂation — Tire Pressure ...... 5-67 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-21 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...... 5-68 Automatic Transaxle Fluid ...... 5-23 When It Is Time for New Tires ...... 5-70 Manual Transaxle Fluid ...... 5-25 Buying New Tires ...... 5-71 Hydraulic Clutch ...... 5-26 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 5-72 Engine Coolant ...... 5-27 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 5-73 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 5-29 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-74 Engine Overheating ...... 5-30 Tire Chains ...... 5-75 Cooling System ...... 5-32 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-76 Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-38 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-77 Windshield Washer Fluid ...... 5-39 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-88

5-1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Appearance Care ...... 5-89 Vehicle Identification ...... 5-97 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ...... 5-89 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 5-97 Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-92 Service Parts Identification Label ...... 5-97 Weatherstrips ...... 5-92 Electrical System ...... 5-97 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ...... 5-92 Add-On Electrical Equipment ...... 5-97 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-94 Headlamp Wiring ...... 5-98 Finish Damage ...... 5-94 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...... 5-98 Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-95 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-95 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 5-98 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...... 5-95 Capacities and Specifications ...... 5-101 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-103

5-2 Service Doing Your Own Service Work Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer want to use the proper service manual. It tells you for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts much more about how to service your vehicle than this and GM-trained and supported service people. manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. page 7-11. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-28.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. CAUTION: (Continued)

5-3 Gasoline Octane CAUTION: (Continued) If your vehicle has the 1.8L engine (VIN Code 8), use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a other fasteners. “English” and “metric” heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use fasteners can be easily confused. If you a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as use the wrong fasteners, parts can later possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A break or fall off. You could be hurt. little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. Adding Equipment to the Outside of If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. Your Vehicle If your vehicle has the 1.8L H.O. DOHC engine Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle (VIN Code L), use only premium unleaded gasoline with can affect the airflow around it. This may cause a posted octane of 91 or higher. In an emergency, wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. you may be able to use a lower octane — as low Check with your dealer before adding equipment to a 87 — if heavy knocking does not occur. Refill your the outside of your vehicle. tank with premium fuel as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are using 91 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy Fuel knocking, your engine needs service. The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on page 5-97.

5-4 Gasoline Specifications California Fuel It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission which were developed by automobile manufacturers Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel is designed to operate on fuels that meet California Charter which is available from the Alliance of specifications. If this fuel is not available in states Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org. adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal improved driveability and emission control system specifications, but emission control system performance performance compared to other gasoline. may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34) In Canada, look for the and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this “Auto Makers’ Choice” occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for label on the pump. diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Canada Only

5-5 Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl are now required to contain additives that will help (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does allowing your emission control system to work not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels properly. You should not have to add anything to your containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the the performance of the emission control system may minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that service. are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due Fuels in Foreign Countries to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline. If you plan on driving in another country outside the Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in to ﬁnd. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not they comply with the speciﬁcations described earlier. be covered by your warranty. Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing contact a major oil company that does business in the methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel country where you will be driving. system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty.

5-6 Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel ﬁre can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, ﬂames and smoking materials away from fuel. Don’t leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle — this The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the is against the law in some places. Keep driver’s side of the vehicle. children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

5-7 The fuel door release lever To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left is located near the ﬂoor (counterclockwise). under the driver’s seat on the outboard side. {CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overﬁll your tank, and wait a few seconds after you’ve ﬁnished pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-92.

While refueling, hang the fuel cap inside of the fuel door.

5-8 When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right Filling a Portable Fuel Container (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the {CAUTION: atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34. Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from { the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. CAUTION: You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to If a fire starts while you’re refueling, don’t you and others: remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by • Dispense gasoline only into approved shutting off the pump or by notifying the containers. station attendant. Leave the area immediately. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. inside of the fill opening before operating This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to the nozzle. Contact should be maintained light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions until the filling is complete. system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline. Index.

5-9 Checking Things Under Hood Release the Hood To open the hood, do the following: 1. Pull the release handle inside the vehicle. It’s {CAUTION: located below the instrument panel to the left of the steering An electric fan under the hood can start up wheel. and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10 4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainer and put the hood prop rod into the slot in the hood. To insert the hood prop rod into the slot, move it straight up. If it is moved to the side or toward the inside of the vehicle, it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the ﬁller caps are 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle. Release the on properly. Make sure to return the hood prop rod secondary hood release by pulling up on the carefully back in its retainer before closing the hood to lever located near the middle of the hood. avoid damaging the vehicle. 3. Lift the hood.

5-11 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood of the 1.8 L (Code 8) engine, you’ll see the following:

5-12 A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped). Washer Fluid on page 5-39. See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23. B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Hydraulic Fluid on page 5-38. Clutch on page 5-26. C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air on page 5-29. Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44. E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine on page 5-27. Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Breakers on page 5-98.

5-13 When you open the hood of the 1.8 L (Code L) H.O. DOHC engine, you’ll see the following:

5-14 A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped). Washer Fluid on page 5-39. See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23. B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Hydraulic Fluid on page 5-38. Clutch on page 5-26. C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air on page 5-29. Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. J. Battery. See Battery on page 5-44. E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine on page 5-27. Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Breakers on page 5-98.

5-15 Engine Oil Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. If the engine oil pressure light appears on the Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or instrument cluster, it cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, means you need to check keeping the tip down, and check the level. your engine oil level right away.

For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on page 3-38. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder. 1.8L (Code 8) Engine Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1.8L (Code L) Engine

5-16 When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the hole at the tip of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Speciﬁcations on page 5-101. Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil ﬁll cap. Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through.

5-17 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things: • GM6094M Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-18 • SAE 5W-30 Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended (–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available, oil can result in engine damage not covered by you may use SAE 10W-30. your warranty. These numbers on an oil container show its ® viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for oils such as SAE 20W-50. your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the Oils meeting these temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommend requirements should also that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an have the starburst SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and symbol on the container. better protection for your engine at extremely low This symbol indicates temperatures. that the oil has been certified by the American Engine Oil Additives Petroleum Institute (API). Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

5-19 When to Change Engine Oil Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter maintenance schedule: every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever • Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is occurs first. particularly important when outside temperatures If none of them are true, use the long trip/highway are below freezing. maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every • Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever driving in stop-and-go traffic). occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to • You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top break down slower. of your vehicle. • The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.

5-20 What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the ﬁlter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. The engine air cleaner/ﬁlter is in the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-21 To check or replace the ﬁlter, do the following: Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air ﬁlter. See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air 1. Release the two clips that hold the cover down. cleaner/filter off. 2. Lift the cover off. 3. Pull out the engine air cleaner/filter. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can 4. Install a new engine air cleaner/filter, if needed. cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. 5. Reinstall the cover. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.

5-22 Automatic Transaxle Fluid If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. When to Check and Change Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or level is when the engine oil is changed. exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid Check the fluid in the transaxle and differential every could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure 30,000 miles (50 000 km). Change the fluid every to get an accurate reading if you check your 60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven transaxle fluid. under one or more of these conditions: Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle • In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature fluid level if you have been driving: regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. • When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). • In hilly or mountainous terrain. • At high speed for quite a while. • When doing frequent trailer towing. • In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather. • Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery • While pulling a trailer. service. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on normal operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F page 6-4. (70°C to 80°C). How to Check Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to choose to have this done at the dealership service drive longer. department.

5-23 Checking the Fluid Level 1. Release the tab and pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. Prepare your vehicle as follows: 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and • Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine then pull it back out again. running. • With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). • With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: lower level. The fluid level must be between the two dimples in the hot range. The automatic transaxle 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick has an orange dipstick back in all the way; then press the tab handle and is located near down to lock the dipstick in place. the front of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-24 How to Add Fluid Manual Transaxle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See When to Check Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is on page 6-26. changed. However, the fluid in your manual transaxle If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper doesn’t require changing. fluid to bring the level into the area between dimples on the dipstick. How to Check 1. Pull out the dipstick. Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership service 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the department. dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than here, or you could get a false reading. one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid because fluid your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the with that label is made especially for your automatic fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or transaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than T-IV exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid Automatic Transmission fluid is not covered by your could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure new vehicle warranty. See “Recommended Fluids to get an accurate reading if you check your and Lubricants” in the Index. transaxle fluid. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the described under “How to Check” previously in vehicle is parked on a level place and the transaxle this section. is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transaxle case. 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then press the tab down to lock the dipstick in place.

5-25 Then, follow these steps: Hydraulic Clutch 1. Remove the filler plug. The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is 2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled the filler plug hole. with DOT-3 brake fluid. 3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid unless it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid fluid as described in the next steps. won’t correct a leak. How to Add Fluid The clutch and brake master cylinder use the same reservoir. Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on Have the system inspected and repaired. page 6-26. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.

5-26 When to Check and What to Use How to Check and Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Check to make sure that the fluid level is at or above Schedule to determine the MIN mark. If the level is below the MIN mark, how often you should see the instructions on the reservoir cap. check the fluid level in your master cylinder reservoir Engine Coolant and for the proper fluid. See Part B: Owner The following explains your cooling system and how to Checks and Services add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem on page 6-19 and Part D: with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on Recommended Fluids page 5-30. and Lubricants on A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and the proper page 6-26. coolant will: • Give freezing protection down to −34°F (− 37°C). • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). • Protect against rust and corrosion. • Help keep the proper engine temperature. • Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

5-27 What to Use Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your one-half half coolant that meets GM warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze Specification 1825-M, which won’t damage aluminum and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and parts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to other parts. GM Specification 1825-M with a complete coolant flush and refill. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, need to add anything else. have your dealer check your cooling system. Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim {CAUTION: to improve the system. These can be harmful. Checking Coolant Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or The vehicle must be on a some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil level surface. When your before the proper coolant mixture will. Your engine is cold, the vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the coolant level should be at proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the LOW, or a little higher. wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot When your engine is warm, but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. the level should be up to FULL, or a little higher. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and the proper coolant.

5-28 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper coolant {CAUTION: mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, {CAUTION: and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you information on how to add coolant to the radiator, badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will see Cooling System on page 5-32. almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure Radiator Pressure Cap cap — even a little — when the engine and Notice: Your radiator cap is a 15.6 psi (110 kPa) radiator are hot. pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overﬂow tube on the radiator ﬁller. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-29 Engine Overheating You will ﬁnd a coolant temperature gage on your {CAUTION: vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-33. Steam from an overheated engine can burn If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch ﬁre. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches ﬁre because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

5-30 If No Steam Is Coming From Your If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. Engine If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear normally. no steam, the problem may not be too serious. If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. • Climb a long hill on a hot day. If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine • Stop after high-speed driving. for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone • Idle for long periods in traffic. out of the vehicle until it cools down. • Tow a trailer. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, help right away. try this for a minute or so: 1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.

5-31 Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what {CAUTION: you’ll see: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank C. Radiator Pressure Cap

5-32 The coolant level should be at or above the FULL mark. If it isn’t, you {CAUTION: may have a leak at the pressure cap or in Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine the radiator hoses, heater parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If hoses, radiator, water you do, you can be burned. pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine ﬁre, and you could be burned. Get any leak ﬁxed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it isn’t, your vehicle needs service. Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

5-33 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Recovery Tank Use the recommended coolant and the proper If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level coolant mixture. isn’t at or above the FULL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and a proper coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more information about the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch ﬁre and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and a proper coolant.

5-34 {CAUTION: CAUTION: (Continued) out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot cooling system, including the radiator pressure engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and and it will burn if the engine parts are hot radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. to turn the pressure cap.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come CAUTION: (Continued)

5-35 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

3. Fill the radiator with the proper coolant mixture, up to the base of the ﬁller neck. See Engine Coolant 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when on page 5-27 for more information about the proper the cooling system, including the radiator pressure coolant mixture. cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it ﬁrst stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

5-36 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the FULL mark. upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, engine cooling fan. but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the ears on the pressure cap are in line with the vent tube.

5-37 Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid You can check your fluid without taking the cap off. Just When to Check Power Steering Fluid look at the reservoir. It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid • When the engine compartment is hot, the level unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or should be between the HOT marks. you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected • When the engine compartment is cool, the level and repaired. should be between the COLD marks.

The power steering fluid What to Use reservoir is located in the To determine what kind of fluid to use, see engine compartment Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on on the passenger’s side of page 6-26. the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on Notice: When adding power steering fluid or page 5-12 for reservoir making a complete fluid change, always use the location. proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-38 Windshield Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in What to Use the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the vehicle. the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. Adding Washer Fluid

The low windshield washer Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add fluid level warning light will washer fluid until the tank is full. come on when the fluid level is too low. See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light on page 3-39.

Canada Only

5-39 Notice: Brakes • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for Brake Fluid adding water. • Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with Water can cause the solution to freeze and DOT-3 brake fluid. See damage your washer fluid tank and other parts Engine Compartment of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t Overview on page 5-12 for clean as well as washer fluid. the location of the • Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters reservoir. full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. • Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not work at all.

5-40 So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION: United States Canada When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is Light on page 3-31. hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

5-41 What to Add Notice: When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container system parts. For example, just a few drops of only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your on page 6-26. brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of around the cap before removing it. This will help fluid. keep dirt from entering the reservoir. • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be {CAUTION: careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance Care on page 5-89. With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

5-42 Brake Wear Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect The GT series has four-wheel disc brakes. All other brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in models have front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. the proper sequence to GM torque specifications. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing are worn and new pads are needed. The sound noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and is moving (except when you are pushing on the inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or brake pedal firmly). changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete {CAUTION: axle sets. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25. The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well. That Brake Pedal Travel could lead to an accident. When you hear the See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in serviced. pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc pads could result in costly brake repair. brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake or heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly correctly. If you drive in that way, then — very applied. This does not mean something is wrong with carefully — make a few moderate brake stops about your brakes. every 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.

5-43 Replacing Brake System Parts Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many chemicals known to the State of California to cause parts have to be of top quality and work well together if cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your handling. vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking Vehicle Storage system — for example, when your brake linings If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure − you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do more, remove the black, negative ( ) cable from not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For the battery. This will help keep your battery from example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong running down. for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance you have come to expect can change {CAUTION: in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you Battery are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-45 for tips on working around a battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free without getting hurt. ACDelco® battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the ® original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on vehicle for longer storage periods. page 5-12 for battery location.

5-44 Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered If your battery has run down, you may want to use by your warranty. another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely. won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a {CAUTION: 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. because: • They contain acid that can burn you. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching • They contain gas that can explode or each other. If they are, it could cause a ground ignite. connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to • They contain enough electricity to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could burn you. damage the electrical systems. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set or all of these things can hurt you. the parking brake ﬁrmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in neutral before setting the parking brake.

5-45 Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. {CAUTION: 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette Using a match near a battery can cause battery lighter. Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren’t gas to explode. People have been hurt doing needed. This will avoid sparks and help save this, and some have been blinded. Use a both batteries. And it could save your radio! flashlight if you need more light. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the Be sure the battery has enough water. You − positive (+) and negative ( ) terminal locations on don’t need to add water to the battery installed each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler on page 5-12 for more information on location. caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. {CAUTION: If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. An electric fan can start up even when the Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in engine is not running and can injure you. Keep your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with hands, clothing and tools away from any water and get medical help immediately. underhood electric fan.

5-46 {CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) unpainted metal engine part or to a remote terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle with the dead positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. battery has one. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-47 7. Don’t let the other end 8. Now connect the black touch metal. Connect it negative (−) cable to to the positive (+) the negative terminal of terminal of the good the good battery. battery. Use a remote Use a remote positive (+) terminal negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. if the vehicle has one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.

5-48 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care that the cables don’t touch each other or any other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

5-49 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle with good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part B. Good Battery C. Dead Battery

5-50 All-Wheel Drive Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive Module) If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section. When to Check and Change Lubricant However, it has two additional systems that need lubrication. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4. When to Check Lubricant How to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic level surface. Maintenance Inspections on page 6-24. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, How to Check Lubricant you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. level surface. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it repaired, if needed. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant What to Use to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what What to Use kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.

5-51 Bulb Replacement Headlamps For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59. Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. A. Headlamp B. Turn Signal Lamp

5-52 To replace the headlamp bulb, do the following: 1. Open the hood and locate the lamp assembly.

2. Remove the rubber cover and socket from the headlamp.

5-53 Front Turn Signal Lamps To replace the front turn signal lamp bulbs, do the following: 1. See Headlamps on page 5-52. 2. Locate the turn signal bulb. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it out of the lamp housing. 4. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.

3. Release the retainer clip holding the bulb by pressing down and moving the metal retainer away from you. 4. Pull the bulb out of the ﬁxture. 5. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.

5-54 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb, do the following: 1. The bulb is located on the inside of the liftgate liftglass near the top. Remove the two clips on both sides of the cover and remove it.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it out of the lamp housing.

2. Unscrew the two screws from the CHMSL housing and remove the housing to expose the bulb.

5-55 Rear Combination Lamps To replace the turn signal and brake lamp bulbs, do the following: A. Brake Lamp B. Turn Signal Lamp

4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 5. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.

5-56 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it out of the lamp housing.

1. Remove the storage compartment cover in the rear cargo area of the vehicle to access the bulbs.

5-57 3. Pull the bulb straight Back-Up Lamps out of the socket. The back-up lamp bulb is located below the rear combination lamps.

4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb. 5. Reinstall the cover. To replace the back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Reach up under the rear fascia to locate the back-up lamp housing.

5-58 2. Turn the bulb socket Replacement Bulbs counterclockwise and pull it out of the Lamps Bulb Number lamp housing. Headlamp High-/Low-Beam 9003 Front Turn Signal 1157NA Brake Lamp 7443 Back-Up Lamps 7440 Rear Turn Signal 7440 CHMSL 921

3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Reverse the previous steps to install a new bulb.

5-59 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check” under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-20 for more information. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. 3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

5-60 Tires CAUTION: (Continued) Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions Underinﬂated tires pose the same danger about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, • see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional as overloaded tires. The resulting accident information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet could cause serious injury. Check all tires included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual and other frequently to maintain the recommended glove compartment literature. pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. • Overinﬂated tires are more likely to be { cut, punctured or broken by a sudden CAUTION: impact — such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If are dangerous. your tread is badly worn, or if your tires • Overloading your tires can cause have been damaged, replace them. overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. CAUTION: (Continued)

5-61 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into it’s sidewall. The following illustration shows an example of a passenger car tire sidewall.

5-62 A. Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and B. Department of Transportation (DOT) numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and C. Tire Identification Number (TIN) plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. D. Tire Ply Material The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire. E. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies F. Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit in the sidewall and under the tread. Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, manufacturers are required to grade tires based on height, aspect ratio, construction type and service three performance factors: treadwear, traction and description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this temperature resistance. For more information see section for more detail. Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72. Department of Transportation (DOT): The Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that that can be carried and the maximum pressure the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of needed to support that load. For information on Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. recommended tire pressure see Inflation — Tire Pressure on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

5-63 Tire Size Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the The following illustration shows an example of a typical first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle passenger car tire size. tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association. Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide. Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter “R” means A. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire radial ply construction; the letter “D” means diagonal or B. Tire Width bias ply construction; and the letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. C. Aspect Ratio D. Belt Rating Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches. E. Rim Diameter Load Range: The load range represents the load carry F. Load Range capacity a tire is certified to carry. G. Speed Rating Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from “A” to “Z”.

5-64 Tire Terminology and Definitions Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, without outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure passengers and cargo. is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety of optional accessories, for example, automatic standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification transmission, power steering, power brakes, power Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can windows, power seats, radio and air conditioning. also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front from steel or other reinforcing materials. axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires that hold the GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle, tire onto the rim. see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of mounted on a vehicle. the tread. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi. a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before a tire has built up heat Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty from driving. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-67. trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-65 Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose a tire. vehicles. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure shown on the tire placard. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: The 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. the bead. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical can operate. tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that Traction: The friction between the tire and the road contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears surface. The amount of grip provided. manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes other sidewall of the tire. called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-70.

5-66 Tread Width: The width of the tire’s tread. Inflation — Tire Pressure UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire The tire and loading information label, shows the correct information system that provides consumers with inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). government testing procedures. The ratings are molded See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72. Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of designated don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get seating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg) the following: plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32 • Too much flexing • Too much heat Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, • Tire overloading occupant weight and cargo weight. • Bad wear Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a • Bad handling vehicle showing original equipment tire size and the recommended cold inflation pressure. See Loading • Bad fuel economy Your Vehicle on page 4-32. If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following: • Unusual wear • Bad handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards

5-67 When to Check Tire Inspection and Rotation Check your tires once a month or more. Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be (8 000 to 13 000 km). at 60 psi (420 kPa). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also How to Check check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire for New Tires on page 5-70 and Wheel Replacement pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated on page 5-74 for more information. simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure Maintenance Services on page 6-4 for scheduled measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches rotation intervals. the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

5-68 After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inﬂation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Speciﬁcations on page 5-101.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. pattern shown here. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a Tires should only be moved from front to rear and rear paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a to front on the same side of the vehicle. scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. Tire” in the Index.

5-69 When It Is Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: One way to tell when it’s • You can see the indicators at three or more places time for new tires is to around the tire. check the treadwear • You can see cord or fabric showing through the indicators, which will tire’s rubber. appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged (1.6 mm) or less of tread deep enough to show cord or fabric. remaining. • The tire has a bump, bulge or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

5-70 Buying New Tires CAUTION: (Continued) To ﬁnd out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the tire and loading information label. For more Be sure to use the same size and type tires on information about this label and where to ﬁnd it, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily, it was developed Make sure the replacements are the same size, for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare load capacity, speed rating and construction type Tire” in the index. (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION: {CAUTION: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the wheel rim ﬂanges could develop cracks after vehicle may not handle properly, and you many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could have a crash. Using tires of different could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. CAUTION: (Continued)

5-71 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear Quality grades can be found where applicable on the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled selection width. For example: conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A a half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires The following information relates to the system depends upon the actual conditions of their use, developed by the Unites States National Highway Traffic however, and may depart significantly from the norm Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, due to variations in driving habits, service practices and traction and temperature performance. (This applies differences in road characteristics and climate. only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car Traction — AA, A, B, C tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled limited-production tires. conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor While the tires available on General Motors passenger traction performance. Warning: The traction grade cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking grades, they must also conform to federal safety traction tests, and does not include acceleration, requirements. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-72 Temperature — A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced representing the tire’s resistance to the generation carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested and best overall performance. under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are cause the material of the tire to degenerate and not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle level of performance which all passenger car tires must vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard may need to be rebalanced. No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

5-73 Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted {CAUTION: or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). dangerous. It could affect the braking and See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. air and make you lose control. You could have Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying a collision in which you or others could be capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel the same way as the one it replaces. bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, for your vehicle. vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-77 for more information.

5-74 Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains

Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only { when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains CAUTION: that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires for front-wheel-drive vehicles. Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is If your vehicle has all-wheel-drive, install the dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used tire chains on the front or all four tires but never on or how far it’s been driven. It could fail the rear tires only. Tighten them as tightly as suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive replace a wheel, use a new GM original slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting equipment wheel. your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.

5-75 If a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving, {CAUTION: especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few maintenance or repairs is dangerous without tips about what to expect and what to do: the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that The jack provided with your vehicle is pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. used for anything else, you or others could be Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off a stop well out of the traffic lane. the jack. Use the jack provided with your A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a vehicle only for changing a flat tire. skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

5-76 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes ﬂat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning ﬂashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake ﬁrmly. 2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). change a tire. 3. Turn off the engine. To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-77 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jack, wheel wrench, jack handle and spare tire are stowed in the rear of the vehicle, underneath the ﬂoor of the cargo area. To remove the spare tire and tools do the following: 1. Turn the two lock knobs on the ﬂoor of the cargo area to UNLOCK.

2. Lift up the cargo area ﬂoor panel, remove the hook attached to the bottom side of the panel and hook it over the weatherstripping.

5-78 Notice: Make sure to place the hook in the proper location in order to avoid damaging the vehicle. Be sure to remove the hook when ﬁnished and place it back in its original position before closing the liftgate. 3. Remove the jack from the tray on the right side of the compartment and the jack handle and wheel wrench from the top side of the compartment.

5. Unscrew the center bolt from the compact spare tire and pull out the compact spare tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88 for more information about the compact spare tire.

4. Unscrew the center retaining nut and lift up the plastic tray to expose the compact spare tire.

5-79 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jack handle (B) and wheel wrench (C). 6. Attach the jack handle to the jack. 1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts. 7. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the lift head. Don’t remove them yet.

5-80 {CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even 2. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fit make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal over the car flange between the two notches. injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

5-81 4. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the ﬂat tire.

5. Remove any rust or dirt 3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle from the wheel bolts, clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the mounting surfaces ground so there is enough room for the compact and spare wheel. spare tire to ﬁt underneath the wheel well.

5-82 {CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. 6. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. {CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-83 {CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut 7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle torque specification. counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 8. Tighten the wheel nuts Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead firmly in a crisscross to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid sequence as shown. expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See “Capacities and Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque specification.

5-84 Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

Return the jack, jack handle and wheel wrench to the storage area. The compact spare tire storage area is designed only for the compact spare tire, the standard tire cannot be stored there.

To store the flat tire do the following: 4. Hook the belts (end closest to the buckle) to the 1. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the rear, upper tie-down hooks. center wheel cap before storing the flat tire. 2. Place the flat tire on the rear cargo area floor panel with the outer side of the wheel facing up. 3. Use the tire tie-down belts located under the floor panel to secure the flat tire.

5-85 5. Pass the belts through the center hole of the wheel. 7. Position the tire edge against the rear center end of 6. Attach the other end of the belts to the rear, the ﬂoor panel. Pull the end of the belts to make lower tie-down hooks. sure the tire is secure.

5-86 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

A. Jack D. Spare Tire B. Wheel Wrench E. Jack Handle C. Bolt F. Nut

Return the jack, jack handle, wheel wrench and compact spare tire to the storage area. When storing the compact spare tire, put it in place with the inner side of the wheel facing up. The compact spare tire storage area is designed only for the compact spare tire, the standard tire cannot be stored there.

5-87 Compact Spare Tire Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be and maybe other parts of your vehicle. 60 psi (420 kPa). Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles. After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with should stop as soon as possible and make sure other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare and its wheel together. is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire Using them can damage your vehicle and can repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as your compact spare. you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.

5-88 Appearance Care Do not use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some • Alcohol are toxic. Others can burst into ﬂames if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are • Laundry Soap dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed • Bleach space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s • Reducing Agents warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you are cleaning the inside. Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Never use these to clean your vehicle: Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and • Gasoline loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted • Benzene surfaces with a clean, damp cloth. • Naphtha Cleaning Fabric/Carpet • Carbon Tetrachloride Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric • Acetone and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. • Paint Thinner You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your • Turpentine dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on • Lacquer Thinner page 5-95. • Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous — some more than others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

5-89 Here are some cleaning tips: Special Fabric Cleaning Problems • Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), • Clean up stains as soon as you can — before egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine they set. and blood can be removed as follows: • Carefully scrape off any excess stain. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. • Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are 2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions stubborn. described earlier. • If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the entire area immediately or it will set. the area with a water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) Using Cleaner on Fabric of lukewarm water. 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any 4. Let dry. loose dirt. Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 3. Follow the directions on the container label. 2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely. 4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate 3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions the material and do not rub it roughly. described earlier. 5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner. 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened towel or cloth. 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

5-90 Cleaning Vinyl Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Use warm water and a clean cloth. Panel • Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces may have to do this more than once. of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if • windshield and even make it difficult to see through the you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth windshield under certain conditions. and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Cleaning Leather Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let surface finish. the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. • For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. Cleaning Glass Surfaces • Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See • Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95. immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.

5-91 Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Keep belts clean and dry. Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth {CAUTION: of color, gloss retention and durability. Washing Your Vehicle Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is may severely weaken them. In a crash, they to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm might not be able to provide adequate or cold water. protection. Clean safety belts only with mild Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. soap and lukewarm water. Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. Weatherstrips See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the every six months. During very cold, damp weather surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, more frequent application may be required. See clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on scratches and water spotting. page 6-26. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

5-92 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a foreign matter. car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a Finish Care period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by whenever possible. hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products Windshield, Backglass and Wiper from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Blades Materials on page 5-95. If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint windshield. finish. Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive not form when you rinse it with water. polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., with water. can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.

5-93 Aluminum Wheels Sheet Metal Damage Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or may then be applied. replaced to restore corrosion protection. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not Finish Damage use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. expense. Tires Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish and tires.

5-94 Underbody Maintenance Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing control can collect on the underbody. If these are not the following products. removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials protection. Description Usage At least every spring, flush these materials from the Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud Wax-Treated polishing cloth. and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of Tar and Road Oil Removes tar, road oil and the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Remover asphalt. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Polish stainless steel. Chemical Paint Spotting White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black Cleaner marks from whitewalls. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a Cleans vinyl tops, chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and Vinyl Cleaner upholstery and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage convertible tops. can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, Removes dirt, grime, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint Glass Cleaner surface. smoke and fingerprints. Removes dirt and grime Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will Chrome and Wire Wheel from chrome wheels and repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of Cleaner new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within wire wheel covers. 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

5-95 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials (cont’d) (cont’d) Description Usage Description Usage Removes dust, Medium foaming fingerprints, and surface shampoo. Cleans and Finish Enhancer contaminants. Spray on Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes. wipe off. Biodegradable and Removes swirl marks, phosphate free. fine scratches and other Quickly and easily Swirl Remover Polish light surface removes spots and stains Spot Lifter contamination. from carpets, vinyl and Removes light scratches cloth upholstery. Cleaner Wax and protects finish. Odorless spray odor Cleans, shines and eliminator used on Foaming Tire Shine Low Odor Eliminator protects in one easy step, fabrics, vinyl, leather and Gloss no wiping necessary. carpet. See your General Motors parts department for these products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.

5-96 Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: • your VIN, • the model designation, • paint information and • a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on Electrical System the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Add-On Electrical Equipment labels and the certificates of title and registration. Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your Engine Identification vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your code will help you identify your engine, specifications warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can and replacement parts. keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.

5-97 Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Breakers The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker. The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and short circuits by fuses, circuit breakers and fusible off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the have your headlamp wiring checked right away. chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Windshield Wiper Fuses If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit correct size. breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, a spare fuse, you can borrow one. Just pick some and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed. feature of your vehicle that you can get along without – like the radio or air conditioner – and use its fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon as Power Windows and Other Power you can. Options Before replacing a fuse, turn every electrical switch off. Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

5-98 Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses Usage Stop Lamps, CHMSL, Engine STOP Control System, Anti-lock Brakes, Cruise Control DOOR Power Door Locks, Liftglass Lock Cigarette Lighter, Gauge, ECU-IG, AM1 Wiper, Rear Wiper, Washer Fuses Cruise Control, Anti-Lock Brakes, Theft Deterrent System, Automatic ECU-IG Transaxle Control System, Electric Cooling Fan Rear Window Wiper, Rear Window RR WIPER Defogger The instrument panel fuse block is located underneath A/C Air Conditioning the instrument panel on the driver’s side of the INV Power Outlets vehicle. P/POINT Power Outlets ECU-B Daytime Running Lamps Fuses Usage Cigarette Lighter, Power Rearview Mirrors, Power Outlets, Audio Front Parking Lamps, Taillamps, CIG TAIL License Plate Lamps, Instrument System, Automatic Transaxle Panel Lights, Engine Control System Control System OBD On-Board Diagnostic System Gauges and Meters, Back-Up Lamps, Charging System, Power WIPER Windshield Wipers GAUGE Door Locks, Power Windows, AM2 Charging System, Air Bag System, Sunroof, Air Conditioning, Cruise Starter System, Engine Control Control WASHER Windshield Washers *1 Engine Control System

5-99 Engine Compartment Fuse Block Fuses Usage MAIN Starter System, AM2 Fuse AMP Audio Ampliﬁers MAYDAY Not Used SPARE Spare Fuse SPARE Spare Fuse SPARE Spare Fuse ABS NO. 2 Anti-lock Brake System RDI FAN Electronic Cooling Fan System ABS NO. 1 Anti-lock Brake System Charging System, DEFOG, HEATER, GAUGE, ECU-IG, This engine compartment fuse block is located in the ALT WIPER, RR WIP, WASHER, ABS engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle NO. 1, ABS NO. 2, RDI FAN, FOG, near the air cleaner. See Engine Compartment GAUGE, INV, AM1 Fuses Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. HEAD RH Right-hand Headlamp Fuses Usage HEAD LH Left-hand Headlamp HEAD MAIN Right Headlamp, Left Headlamp FOG Front Fog Lamps Fuses ALT-S Charging System EFI Electronic Fuel Injection System Relays Usage DIMMER Headlamp Dimmer HAZARD Turn Signal Lamps, Emergency Flasher FAN NO. 2 Cooling Fan System HORN Horn FAN NO. 1 Cooling Fan System Interior Lights, Gauges and Meters, EFI Electronic Fuel Injection System DOME Audio System, Remote Keyless Entry System

5-100 Capacities and Speciﬁcations The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.

Capacities Application English Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1.41 lbs 0.64 kg Automatic Transaxle 1.8L Engine (Code 8) 3.2 quarts 3.0 L 3.1 quarts 2.9 L 1.8L Engine (Code 8) with AWD 4.3 quarts 4.1 L 1.8L Engine (Code L)

Cooling System 6.9 quarts 6.5 L 1.8L Engine (Code 8) 7.1 quarts 6.7 L 1.8L H.O. Engine (Code L)

Engine Oil with Filter 3.9 quarts 3.7 L 1.8L Engine (Code 8) 4.8 quarts 4.4 L 1.8L Engine (Code L)

Fuel Tank 11.9 gallons 45.0 L With AWD 13.2 gallons 50.0 L Without AWD

5-101 Capacities Application English Metric

Manual Transaxle 2.0 quarts 1.9 L Five-Speed 2.4 quarts 2.3 L Six-Speed Rear Differential 0.5 quarts 0.5 L Transfer Case 0.8 quarts 0.8 L

Wheels and Tires 76 lb-ft 103 Y Wheel Nut Torque All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to ﬁll to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26.

Engine Speciﬁcations Engine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap L4 8 Automatic and Manual 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) 1.8L Engine L4 L Automatic and Manual 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) 1.8L H.O. DOHC Engine

5-102 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Part Number Battery ACDelco® Part No. 19001602 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter GM Part No. 88969107

Engine Oil Filter GM Part No. 88971573 Engine Oil Filter (Code 8) GM Part No. 88969580 Engine Oil Filter (Code L) Passenger Compartment Air Filter GM Part No. 88970273 PCV Valve PCV Valve (Code 8 base model) GM Part No. 94859406 GM Part No. 94859404 PCV Valve (Code 8 AWD Model) GM Part No. 88969512 PCV Valve (Code L) DENSO SK16R11, NGK IFR5A11 Spark Plugs or GM Part No. 94859448 1.8 L Engine (Code 8) DENSO SK20R11, 1.8 L Engine (Code L) NGK IFR6A11 or GM Part No. 88969637 *Your engine is ﬁtted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engine performance.

5-103 ✍ NOTES

5-104 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-2 At Least Twice a Year ...... 6-20 Introduction ...... 6-2 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-21 Maintenance Requirements ...... 6-2 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-24 Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle How This Section is Organized ...... 6-3 Boot and Seal Inspection ...... 6-24 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 6-4 Exhaust System Inspection ...... 6-24 Using Your Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-4 Fuel System Inspection ...... 6-24 Selecting the Right Schedule ...... 6-5 Engine Cooling System Inspection ...... 6-25 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-7 Throttle System Inspection ...... 6-25 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-14 Brake System Inspection ...... 6-25 Part B: Owner Checks and Services ...... 6-19 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-26 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-19 Part E: Maintenance Record ...... 6-28 At Least Once a Month ...... 6-19

6-1 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and Introduction recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and working condition. Any damage caused by failure change as recommended. to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good for details. condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2 How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains services can be complex, so unless you are technically important inspections that your dealer’s service qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should department can perform for you. let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service some recommended products necessary to help people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts. keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. {CAUTION: “Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you repairs. can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.

If you want to get the service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

6-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service Services people will perform the work using genuine GM parts. In this part are scheduled maintenance services which The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified. Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the Using Your Maintenance Schedule vehicle. We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good These schedules are for vehicles that: working condition. But we don’t know exactly how • carry passengers and cargo within recommended you’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few limits. You will find these on your vehicle’s tire times a week. Or you may drive long distances all and loading information label. See Loading Your the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your Vehicle on page 4-32. vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal Because of the different ways people use their vehicles, driving limits. maintenance needs may vary. You may need more • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane frequent checks and replacements. So please read the on page 5-4. following and note how you drive. If you have questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer. This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when to schedule them.

6-4 Selecting the Right Schedule Short Trip/City Intervals First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). schedule to follow: Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation. Engine Short Trip/City Definition Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger • Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is Compartment Air Filter Replacement. Transfer Case Fluid Change (when trailer towing). Rear Differential particularly important when outside temperatures Fluid Change (when trailer towing). are below freezing. • Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner driving in stop-and-go traffic). Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap, Cap Gasket and Lines Inspection (or every 24 months, whichever occurs • You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top first). Automatic Transaxle Check. Manual Transaxle of your vehicle. Fluid Change (severe conditions only) (or every • If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, 24 months, whichever occurs first). Cooling System taxi or other commercial application. Service (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Automatic Transaxle you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions Fluid Change (severe conditions only). Valve Clearance is that these conditions cause engine oil to break Inspection, adjust if necessary (or every 48 months, down sooner. whichever occurs first).

6-5 At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Or 48 Months, Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger Whichever Occurs First) — Then Every 15,000 Miles Compartment Air Filter Replacement. (25 000 km) (or 12 Months, Whichever Occurs First): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap, Cap Gasket and Every 120,000 Miles (200 000 km): Spark Plug Lines Inspection (or every 24 months, whichever occurs Replacement. first). Automatic Transaxle Fluid Check. Manual Transaxle Fluid Change (severe conditions only) (or These intervals only summarize maintenance services. every 24 months, whichever occurs first). Cooling System Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance Service (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). on the following pages. Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Long Trip/Highway Definition Fluid Change (severe conditions only). Valve Clearance Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the Inspection, adjust if necessary (or every 48 months, conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled whichever occurs first). Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (or 48 Months, vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area Whichever Occurs First) — Then Every 15,000 Miles or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City (25 000 km) (or 12 Months, Whichever Occurs schedule for these conditions First): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down Every 120,000 Miles (200 000 km): Spark Plug slower. Replacement. These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Long Trip/Highway Intervals Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages. Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.

6-6 Short Trip/City Scheduled 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) Maintenance ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) (166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, this vehicle. The service shown at 120,000 miles whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (200 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval ❑ after 120,000 miles (200 000 km) for the life of this Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation vehicle. on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19 ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. page 6-24. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) Footnotes 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, California Air Resources Board has determined that the whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, ❑ urge that all recommended maintenance services be Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, performed at the indicated intervals and the whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. maintenance be recorded. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and +A good time to check your brakes is during tire additional information. (See footnote +.) rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25. ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-7 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation ❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and trailer towing. additional information. (See footnote +.) ❑ ❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in trailer towing. dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ❑ whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-8 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) ❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid. ❑ ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. trailer towing. ❑ ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent trailer towing. ❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) ❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation ❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and 24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine additional information. (See footnote +.) Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses. ❑ Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a trailer.

6-9 39,000 Miles (65 000 km) 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, additional information. (See footnote +.) whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) additional information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation ❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid. on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent ❑ trailer towing. Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving ❑ in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) trailer towing. 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-10 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) ❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, trailer. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. (100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under ❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every one or more of these conditions: 48 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission − In heavy city traffic where the outside Control Service. temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) ❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months, or higher. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. − In hilly or mountainous terrain. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation − When doing frequent trailer towing. on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) − Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. ❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjust valve clearance to factory specifications if necessary If you do not use your vehicle under any of these (or every 48 months, whichever occurs first). conditions, check the fluid. See Part D: Recommended An Emission Control Service. Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26 for the proper fluid to use. ❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever ❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission trailer towing. Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent ❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every trailer towing. 24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses. 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-11 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and ❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months additional information. (See footnote +.) since last inspection). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in ❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent trailer dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An towing. Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) trailer towing. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation ❑ on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving additional information. (See footnote +.) in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-12 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) ❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for damage or leaks (or every 24 months whichever ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional additional information. (See footnote +.) information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in ❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An 24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) trailer. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Change transfer case fluid when doing frequent ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. trailer towing. ❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every ❑ Change rear differential fluid when doing frequent 12 months since last inspection). An Emission Control trailer towing. Service. ❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

6-13 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) Long Trip/Highway Scheduled ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, Maintenance whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) (166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, (166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. this vehicle. The services shown at 120,000 miles (200 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation after 120,000 miles (200 000 km) for the life of this on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and vehicle. additional information. (See footnote +.) See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-19 ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An page 6-24. Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) Footnotes ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify 120,000 Miles (200 000 km) the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, ❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. +A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-25.

6-14 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on information. (See footnote +.) page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, Control Service. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control ❑ Service. Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on Control Service. (See footnote †.) page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional ❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every information. (See footnote +.) 24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses. 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.) Service. ❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on (50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional trailer. information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Check automatic transaxle fluid.

6-15 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on information. (See footnote +.) page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, 48 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Control Service. Service. ❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every 24 months, ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on ❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever information. (See footnote +.) occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) Control Service. (See footnote †.) ❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration. Adjust ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, valve clearance to factory specifications if necessary whichever occurs first). An Emission Control (or every 48 months, whichever occurs first). An Service. Emission Control Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on ❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional 24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine information. (See footnote +.) Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-16 ❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a ❑ trailer. Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, ❑ whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Change automatic transaxle fluid every 60,000 miles Service. (100 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under ❑ one or more of these conditions: Replace passenger compartment air filter. ❑ − In heavy city traffic where the outside Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional or higher. information. (See footnote +.) ❑ − In hilly or mountainous terrain. Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months since last inspection). An Emission Control Service. − When doing frequent trailer towing. − Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) service. ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, If you do not use your vehicle under any of these whichever occurs first). An Emission Control conditions, check the fluid. See Part D: Recommended Service. Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-26 for the proper ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on fluid to use. page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) information. (See footnote +.) ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

6-17 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) ❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) only if your vehicle is used to tow a ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, trailer. whichever occurs first). An Emission Control ❑ Service. Check automatic transaxle fluid. ❑ ❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional ❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission information. (See footnote +.) Control Service. ❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket and lines for 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever ❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An Emission whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Control Service. (See footnote †.) Service. ❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or 12 months ❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on since last inspection). An Emission Control Service. page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional ❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every information. (See footnote +.) 24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use. Inspect hoses. 120,000 Miles (200 000 km) Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. ❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

6-18 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Listed in this part are owner checks and services Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield which should be performed at the intervals specified to washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. help ensure the safety, dependability and emission See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-39 for further control performance of your vehicle. details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Hood Latch Operation Check Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown Pull the primary hood latch release handle inside the in Part D. vehicle. The secondary latch should keep the hood from opening all the way when the primary latch is released. Make sure the hood closes firmly. See Hood Release At Each Fuel Fill on page 5-10 for further details. It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. At Least Once a Month Engine Oil Level Check Tire Inflation Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further inflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to check details. your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-69 for further Engine Coolant Level Check details. Check the engine coolant level and add the proper coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for further details.

6-19 At Least Twice a Year Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last Restraint System Check longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages damp weather more frequent application may be are working properly. Look for any other loose or required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything Lubricants on page 6-26. that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts Fluid Level Check replaced. Check the power steering pump and automatic or Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, manual transaxle ﬂuid levels and add as needed. See and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag Power Steering Fluid on page 5-38 and Automatic system does not need regular maintenance.) Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23 or Manual Transaxle Fluid on page 5-25. Check for leaks. A ﬂuid loss in these Wiper Blade Check systems could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired at once. Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-92.

6-20 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check Key Lock Cylinders Service { Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant CAUTION: speciﬁed in Part D. When you are doing this check, the vehicle Seat Operation Check could move suddenly. If it does, you or others Make sure the head restraints stay in position and all could be injured. Follow the steps below. seat latches lock. Check that the recliner holds by pushing and pulling the seatback while it is reclined. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room Body Lubrication Service around the vehicle. Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch, 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 if hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat necessary. hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive turn off the engine immediately if it starts. environment. 3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the ﬂoor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.

6-21 Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control Ignition Transaxle Lock Check System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. • With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to {CAUTION: LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). • With a manual transaxle, the key should turn to When you are doing this check, the vehicle LOCK only if you push the key in farther, while could move suddenly. If it does, you or others turning it toward LOCK. could be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 if necessary. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

6-22 Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the Park (P) Mechanism Check parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With { the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), CAUTION: slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the When you are doing this check, your vehicle parking brake only. could begin to move. You or others could be • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: injured and property could be damaged. Make With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then sure there is room in front of your vehicle in release the parking brake followed by the regular case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the brake. regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to ﬂush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

6-23 Part C: Periodic Exhaust System Inspection Maintenance Inspections Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, Listed in this part are inspections and services which missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, holes, loose connections or other conditions which each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s could cause a heat build-up in the ﬂoor pan or could let service department do these jobs. Make sure any exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust necessary repairs are completed at once. on page 2-33. Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See Service Publications Fuel System Inspection Ordering Information on page 7-11. Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks. Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chaﬁng, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.

6-24 Engine Cooling System Inspection Brake System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, ﬁttings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the chaﬁng, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. at least once a year. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving Throttle System Inspection habits or conditions result in frequent braking. Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.

6-25 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant Lubricants Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part Hydraulic See “Hydraulic Brake System.” number or specification may be obtained from your Clutch System dealer. Windshield GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Washer Solvent ® Engine oil which meets GM Power Steering DEXRON -III Automatic Standard GM6094M and displays System Transmission Fluid. the American Petroleum Institute GM Goodwrench Synthetic Manual Certified for Gasoline Engines Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. Engine Oil Manual U.S. 12346190, in Canada starburst symbol. To determine the Transaxle proper viscosity for your vehicle’s 10953477 — 1 quart) or SAE engine, see Engine Oil on 75W-90 GL-5 gear oil. page 5-16. Use only T-IV Automatic 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. Automatic U.S. 88900925, in Canada water (preferably distilled) and good Transaxle quality Ethylene Glycol Base 22689186). See Automatic Coolant (GM Part No. U.S. Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23. 12378560, in Canada 993089, Engine Coolant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube or equivalent) conforming to GM Key Lock (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Specification 1825M or approved Cylinders Canada 10953474). recycled coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825M. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27.

6-26 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. Transfer Case Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. Manual U.S. 12377985, in Canada (All-Wheel 12345977, in Canada 10953482) or Transaxle Shift 88901242) or lubricant meeting Drive) SAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant. Linkage requirements of NLGI #2, Category Hood Latch LB or GC-LB. Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in U.S. 12377985, in Canada Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant Clutch Linkage 88901242) or lubricant meeting Spring Anchor meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Pivot Points requirements of NLGI #2, Category and Release Category LB or GC-LB. LB or GC-LB. Pawl Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Hood and Door (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Floor Shift Canada 992723) or lubricant Hinges Linkage Canada 10953474). meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part Category LB or GC-LB. Weatherstrip No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. Conditioning 992887). U.S. 12377985, in Canada Chassis 88901242) or lubricant meeting Lubrication requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Rear Axle Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. (All-Wheel 12345977, in Canada 10953482) or Drive) SAE 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.

6-27 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Record Reading

6-28 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Record Reading

6-29 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Date Serviced By Maintenance Record Reading

6-30 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance Information ...... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 7-10 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the Online Owner Center ...... 7-4 United States Government ...... 7-10 Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Telephone (TTY) Users ...... 7-4 Canadian Government ...... 7-10 Customer Assistance Offices ...... 7-4 Reporting Safety Defects to GM Mobility Program for Persons General Motors ...... 7-11 with Disabilities ...... 7-6 Service Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-11 Roadside Assistance Program ...... 7-6 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-8

7-1 Customer Assistance STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be Information resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service following information available to give the Customer departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best Assistance Representative: intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can • Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (This is available from occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: top left of the instrument panel and visible through STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of the windshield.) dealership management. Normally, concerns can • Dealership name and location be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage manager, contact the owner of the dealership or When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your the general manager. concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One ﬁrst if you have a concern.

7-2 STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer are You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the committed to making sure you are completely satisfied toll-free telephone number or write them at the following with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain address: unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps BBB Auto Line Program One and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Suite 800 Assistance Information booklet for information on the Arlington, VA 22203-1804 Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program This program is available in all 50 states and the District administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue Although you may be required to resort to this informal its participation in this program. dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

7-3 Online Owner Center Customer Assistance for Text The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership Telephone (TTY) Users needs. You can find your specific vehicle information all in one place. To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), The Owner Center allows you to: Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer • Get e-mail service reminders. Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). • Access information about your specific vehicle, (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner’s manual. (United States only) Customer Assistance Offices • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and maintenance schedule. Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to Find GM dealers for service nationwide. • write to Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to • Receive special promotions and privileges only Pontiac’s Customer Assistance Center. available to members. (United States only) United States – Customer Assistance Refer to the web for updated information. Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com. P.O. Box 33172 (United States) or My GM Canada within Detroit, MI 48232-5172 www.gmcanada.com (Canada). 1-800-762-2737 or 1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743) Fax Number: 313-381-0022

7-4 From Puerto Rico: Overseas – Customer Assistance 1-800-496-9992 (English) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Fax Number: 313-381-0022 Mexico, Central America and From U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 Caribbean Islands/Countries Fax Number: 313-381-0022 (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Canada – Customer Assistance Islands) – Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 Customer Assistance Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Col. Lomas de Bezares 1-800-263-3777 (English) C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 1-800-263-7854 (French) 01-800-508-0000 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons Roadside Assistance Program with Disabilities Security While You Travel This program, available to 1-800-ROADSIDE (1-800-762-3743) qualified applicants, can As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are reimburse you up to automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside $1,000 toward aftermarket Assistance program. This value-added service is driver or passenger intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive adaptive equipment you in the city or travel the open road. may require for your vehicle (hand controls, Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is wheelchair/scooter staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who lifts, etc.). are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making This program can also provide you with free resource arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest information, such as area driver assessment centers and Pontiac dealer. mobility equipment installers. The program is available We will provide the following services for for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you: purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call Fuel delivery the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. • Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. • Lock-out service (identification required) GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call • Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. • Change a flat tire • Jump starts

7-6 We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please of the following additional services depending on provide the following information to give the advisor: your needs: • Location of vehicle • Hotels • Telephone number of your location • Glass replacement • Vehicle model, year and color • Tire repair facilities • Mileage of vehicle • Rental vehicle or taxis • Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN) • Airports or train stations • Vehicle license plate number • Police, ﬁre departments or hospitals Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or In many instances, mechanical failures are covered reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However, judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain or type of occurrence. any payment obligations you might incur. While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743, text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

7-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the them know this, and ask for instructions. Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book. If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in Courtesy Transportation the work day as possible to allow for same day repair. Pontiac has always exempliﬁed quality and value in its Transportation Options offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are Warranty service can generally be completed while you proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac support program for new vehicles. helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail your dealer can offer you one of the following: purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New Shuttle Service Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs. service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one Plan Ahead When Possible way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership. When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

7-8 Public Transportation or Fuel Additional Program Information Reimbursement Courtesy Transportation is available during the If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate may be available for the use of public transportation booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange Information furnished with each new vehicle provides transportation through a friend or relative, detailed warranty coverage information. reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating per day (five day maximum) may be available. Claim dealers and all program options, such as shuttle amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by service, may not be available at every dealer. Please original receipts. contact your dealer for specific information about Courtesy Rental Vehicle availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty, maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This alternative transportation may be available under the requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider your dealer for details. requirements. Requirements vary and may include General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, pursuant to terms and conditions described herein excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion at its sole discretion. of the repair. Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

7-9 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to the If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle United States Government has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you Transport Canada should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic 330 Sparks Street Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying Tower C General Motors. Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it ﬁnds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.

7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to Service Publications Ordering General Motors Information In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in Service Manuals a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write: Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, P.O. Box 33172 brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Detroit, MI 48232-5172 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer General Motors of Canada Limited Case Unit Repair Manual Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 This manual provides information on unit repair service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive procedures, adjustments, and speciﬁcations for GM Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

7-11 Service Bulletins Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Bulletins give technical service information Service Publications are available for current and needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to please specify year and model name of the vehicle. assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE Eastern Time (1-800-463-7483). For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the Owner’s Information World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com Owner publications are written speciﬁcally for owners Or you can write to: and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include Helm, Incorporated the Maintenance Schedule for all models. P. O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and Prices are subject to change without notice and without Warranty Booklet. incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12 Appearance Care (cont.) A Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ...... 5-92 Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-17 Finish Damage ...... 5-94 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 5-39 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-94 Additional Program Information ...... 7-9 Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-95 Additives, Fuel ...... 5-6 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...... 5-95 Add-On Electrical Equipment ...... 5-97 Weatherstrips ...... 5-92 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-45, 3-54 Arming the System ...... 2-14 Air Bag ...... 3-30 Ashtrays ...... 3-19 Readiness Light ...... 3-30 Audio System(s) ...... 3-41 Air Bag System, Supplemental Restraint Care of Your CD Player ...... 3-64 System (SRS) ...... 1-47 Care of Your CDs ...... 3-64 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 5-21 Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-64 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-51 Navigation/Radio System ...... 3-63 All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ...... 4-9 Radio with CD ...... 3-42 Aluminum Wheels ...... 5-94 Radio with Six-Disc CD ...... 3-52 AM ...... 3-63 Setting the Time ...... 3-41 Antenna, Fixed Mast ...... 3-64 Understanding Radio Reception ...... 3-63 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 3-64 System ...... 3-64 Automatic Headlamp System ...... 3-13 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ...... 3-32 Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-18 Anti-lock Brake System ...... 4-7 Fluid ...... 5-23 Appearance Care ...... 5-89 Operation ...... 2-20 Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-92 Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-95 System Check ...... 6-22 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ...... 5-89

1 B C Backing Up ...... 4-38 California Fuel ...... 5-5 Battery ...... 5-44 Canada – Customer Assistance ...... 7-5 Battery Replacement ...... 2-6 Canadian Owners ...... ii Before Leaving on a Long Trip ...... 4-21 Canadian Roadside Assistance ...... 7-8 Body Lubrication Service ...... 6-21 Capacities and Speciﬁcations ...... 5-101 Brake ...... 2-27 Carbon Monoxide ...... 4-24, 4-34, 2-9, 2-33 Parking ...... 2-27 Care of ...... 5-92 System Inspection ...... 6-25 Safety Belts ...... 5-92 System Warning Light ...... 3-31 Your CD Player ...... 3-64 Brake Fluid ...... 5-40 Your CDs ...... 3-64 Brake Wear ...... 5-43 Cargo Cover ...... 2-41 Brakes ...... 5-40 Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-41 Braking ...... 4-6 Carrier Assembly-Differential Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-9 (Rear Drive Module) ...... 5-51 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-16 Center Console Storage Area ...... 2-37 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-52 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...... 5-55 Back-Up Lamps ...... 5-58 Chains, Tires ...... 5-75 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...... 5-55 Charging System Light ...... 3-31 Front Turn Signal Lamps ...... 5-54 Check ...... 3-34 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-52 Engine Light ...... 3-34 Headlamps ...... 5-52 Checking Coolant ...... 5-28 Rear Combination Lamps ...... 5-56 Checking Engine Oil ...... 5-16 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-59 Checking Things Under the Hood ...... 5-10 Buying New Tires ...... 5-71 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-56 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-95

2 Child Restraints ...... 1-33 Climate Control System ...... 3-19 Child Restraint Systems ...... 1-33 Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ...... 3-23 Infants and Young Children ...... 1-29 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-22 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Clutch, Hydraulic ...... 5-26 Children (LATCH System) ...... 1-39 Coinholder(s) ...... 2-37 Older Children ...... 1-27 Compact Disc Messages ...... 3-51, 3-62 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-88 LATCH System ...... 1-41 Content Theft-Deferrent ...... 2-13 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-5 Position ...... 1-42 Coolant ...... 3-33 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Engine Temperature Gage ...... 3-33 Seat Position ...... 1-44 Heater, Engine ...... 2-19 Top Strap ...... 1-36 Cooling System ...... 5-32 Top Strap Anchor Location ...... 1-38 Cruise Control ...... 3-8 Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-36 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-39 Cigarette Lighter ...... 3-19 Cupholder(s) ...... 2-37 Cleaning ...... 5-89 Current and Past Model Order Forms ...... 7-12 Inside of Your Vehicle ...... 5-89 Customer Assistance Information ...... 7-8 Outside of Your Vehicle ...... 5-92 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-8 Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-95 Customer Assistance for Text Weatherstrips ...... 5-92 Telephone (TTY) Users ...... 7-4 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-93 Customer Assistance Offices ...... 7-4 Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-89 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 7-2 Cleaning Glass Surfaces ...... 5-91 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ...... 5-91 Disabilities ...... 7-6 Cleaning Leather ...... 5-91 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11 Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ...... 5-91 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Cleaning Vinyl ...... 5-91 Government ...... 7-10

3 Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Driving (cont.) Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-22 Government ...... 7-10 In Rain and on Wet Roads ...... 4-16 Roadside Assistance Program ...... 7-6 Winter ...... 4-24 Service Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-11 Driving On Grades ...... 4-39 Driving on Snow or Ice ...... 4-24 Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...... 4-18 D Driving Through Flowing Water ...... 4-18 Driving with a Trailer ...... 4-38 Daytime Running Lamps ...... 3-13 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Defogging and Defrosting ...... 3-21 Dinghy Towing ...... 4-31 E Disarming the System ...... 2-15 Electrical System ...... 5-97 Doing Your Own Service Work ...... 5-3 Add-On Equipment ...... 5-97 Dolly Towing ...... 4-32 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 5-98 Door ...... 3-39 Headlamp Wiring ...... 5-98 Ajar Light ...... 3-39 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98 Locks ...... 2-7 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...... 5-98 Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-8 Programs ...... 3-37 Driver ...... 1-14 Engine ...... 5-21 Position, Safety Belt ...... 1-14 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-21 Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 Battery ...... 5-44 Driving ...... 4-15 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ...... 3-34 At Night ...... 4-15 Coolant Heater ...... 2-19 City ...... 4-19 Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 3-33 Defensive ...... 4-2 Coolant ...... 5-27 Drunken ...... 4-2 Cooling System Inspection ...... 6-25 Freeway ...... 4-20 Engine Compartment Overview ...... 5-12

4 Engine (cont.) Fixed Mast Antenna ...... 3-64 Exhaust ...... 2-33 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-6 Oil ...... 5-16 Flat Tire ...... 5-76 Overheating ...... 5-30 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 5-77 Starting ...... 2-18 Floor Mats ...... 2-37 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...... 5-100 Fluid ...... 5-23 Engine Coolant Level Check ...... 6-19 Automatic Transaxle ...... 5-23 Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing ...... 4-40 Manual Transaxle ...... 5-25 Engine Oil Additives ...... 5-19 Power Steering ...... 5-38 Engine Oil Level Check ...... 6-19 Windshield Washer ...... 5-39 Entry Lighting ...... 3-15 Fluid Level Check ...... 6-20 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 1-26 FM Stereo ...... 3-63 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-12 Folding Seatback, Passenger ...... 1-5 Following Distance ...... 4-38 Fuel ...... 5-4 F Additives ...... 5-6 California Fuel ...... 5-5 Filter ...... 5-21 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ...... 5-9 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 5-21 Filling Your Tank ...... 5-7 Finding a PTY Station ...... 3-55 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...... 5-6 Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™) ...... 3-45 Gage ...... 3-40 Finding a Station ...... 3-43, 3-53 Gasoline Octane ...... 5-4 Finish Care ...... 5-93 Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Finish Damage ...... 5-94 System Inspection ...... 6-24 Five-Speed ...... 2-23 Fuses ...... 5-98 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 5-98 Windshield Wiper ...... 5-98

5 Hood ...... 5-10 G Checking Things Under ...... 5-10 Gage ...... 3-33 Release ...... 5-10 Engine Coolant Temperature ...... 3-33 Hood Latch Operation Check ...... 6-19 Fuel ...... 3-40 Horn ...... 3-5 Speedometer ...... 3-27 How the System Alarm is Activated ...... 2-15 Tachometer ...... 3-28 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Gasoline ...... 5-4 Recovery Tank ...... 5-34 Octane ...... 5-4 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator ...... 5-36 Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 How to Add Fluid ...... 5-25, 5-26 Glove Box ...... 2-37 How to Check ...... 5-23, 5-25, 5-68 GM Mobility Program for Persons with How to Check and Add Fluid ...... 5-27 Disabilities ...... 7-6 How to Check Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-38 How to Remove and Replace the Floor Mat ...... 2-38 How to Use This Manual ...... ii H How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 1-14 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-4 Hydraulic Clutch ...... 5-26 Head Restraints ...... 1-5 Hydroplaning ...... 4-18 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ...... 3-6 Headlamp Wiring ...... 5-98 Headlamps ...... 5-52 I Bulb Replacement ...... 5-52 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...... 5-31 Front Turn Signal Lamps ...... 5-54 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...... 5-30 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-52 If the Light Is Flashing ...... 3-35 Headlamps On Reminder ...... 3-13 If the Light Is On Steady ...... 3-36 Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ...... 1-3 If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...... 4-28 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-22 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ...... 4-35 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-22 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...... 4-26 Hitches ...... 4-37 Ignition Positions ...... 2-16

6 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ...... 6-22 Keys ...... 2-2 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...... 1-29 Inﬂation — Tire Pressure ...... 5-67 Inspection ...... 6-25 L Brake System ...... 6-25 Lamps ...... 3-12 Engine Cooling System ...... 6-25 Exterior ...... 3-12 Exhaust System ...... 6-24 Interior ...... 3-14 Fuel System ...... 6-24 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-14, 1-23 Part C - Periodic Maintenance ...... 6-24 LATCH System ...... 1-39 Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Child Restraints ...... 1-39 Boot and Seal ...... 6-24 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the Throttle System ...... 6-25 LATCH System ...... 1-41 Instrument Panel ...... 3-26 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-9 Cluster ...... 3-26 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Overview ...... 3-2 Running ...... 2-29 Storage Area ...... 2-37 Liftgate/Liftglass ...... 2-9 Instrument Panel Brightness ...... 3-14 Liftgate/Liftglass Release ...... 2-10 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...... 5-99 Liftglass/Liftgate ...... 2-9 Interior Lamps ...... 3-14 Light ...... 3-30 Air Bag Readiness ...... 3-30 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...... 3-32 J Brake System Warning ...... 3-31 Jump Starting ...... 5-45 Charging System ...... 3-31 Cruise Control ...... 3-39 Door Ajar ...... 3-39 K Low Washer Fluid Warning ...... 3-39 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...... 6-21 Malfunction Indicator ...... 3-34 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-4 Oil Pressure ...... 3-38 Overdrive Off ...... 3-39

7 Light (cont.) Maintenance Schedule (cont.) Safety Belt Reminder ...... 3-28 Maintenance Requirements ...... 6-2 Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-32 Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 6-4 Locks ...... 2-7 Part B - Owner Checks and Services ...... 6-19 Door ...... 2-7 Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-24 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-9 Part D - Recommended Fluids and Power Door ...... 2-8 Lubricants ...... 6-26 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-8 Part E - Maintenance Record ...... 6-28 Long Trip/Highway Deﬁnition ...... 6-6 Selecting the Right Schedule ...... 6-5 Long Trip/Highway Intervals ...... 6-6 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-7 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-14 Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Loss of Control ...... 4-14 Boot and Seal Inspection ...... 6-24 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ...... 3-39 Throttle System Inspection ...... 6-25 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-38 Using Your ...... 6-4 Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...... 4-40 M Making Turns ...... 4-38 Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ...... 5-103 Malfunction Indicator Light ...... 3-34 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-19 Manual Seats ...... 1-2 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-19 Manual Transaxle ...... 2-18 At Least Once a Month ...... 6-19 Fluid ...... 5-25 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-21 Operation ...... 2-23 At Least Twice a Year ...... 6-20 Manual Windows ...... 2-11 Brake System Inspection ...... 6-25 Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ...... 2-6 Engine Cooling System Inspection ...... 6-25 Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Exhaust System Inspection ...... 6-24 Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and Fuel System Inspection ...... 6-24 U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ...... 7-5 How This Section is Organized ...... 6-3 Mirrors ...... 2-35 Introduction ...... 6-2 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-35 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-14 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-36 8 Mirrors (cont.) Owners, Canadian ...... ii Outside Remote Control Mirrors ...... 2-36 Owner’s Information ...... 7-12 MyGMLink.com ...... 7-4 P N Park (P) ...... 2-30 Navigation/Radio System ...... 3-63 Shifting Into ...... 2-28 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-16 Shifting Out of ...... 2-30 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-103 Parking ...... 2-27 Brake ...... 2-27 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-32 O Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P) Mechanism Check ...... 6-23 Odometer ...... 3-27 Parking on Hills ...... 4-39 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-12 Parking Your Vehicle ...... 2-31 Oil ...... 5-16 Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 6-4 Engine ...... 5-16 Part B - Owner Checks and Services ...... 6-19 Pressure Light ...... 3-38 Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-24 Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-27 Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-26 Online Owner Center ...... 7-4 Part E - Maintenance Record ...... 6-28 Operation ...... 3-19 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...... 3-23 Operation Tips ...... 3-22 Passing ...... 4-12, 4-38 Other Warning Devices ...... 3-4 Plan Ahead When Possible ...... 7-8 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-22 Playing a Compact Disc ...... 3-50, 3-57 Outside ...... 2-36 Playing a Speciﬁc Loaded Convex Mirror ...... 2-36 Compact Disc ...... 3-59 Remote Controls Mirrors ...... 2-36 Playing the Radio ...... 3-43, 3-52 Overdrive Off ...... 2-22 Power Steering ...... 4-9 Overdrive Off Light ...... 3-39 Overseas – Customer Assistance ...... 7-5

9 Power ...... 3-17 Reactivating the System ...... 2-15 Accessory Outlets ...... 3-17 Reading Lamp ...... 3-16 Door Locks ...... 2-8 Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ...... 2-40 Electrical System ...... 5-98 Rear Combination Lamps ...... 5-56 Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ...... 3-18 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-7 Steering Fluid ...... 5-38 Rear Seat Passenger Positions ...... 1-22 Windows ...... 2-12 Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts ...... 1-22 Pretensioners, Safety Belt ...... 1-26 Rear Storage Area ...... 2-40 Rear Window Defogger ...... 3-21 Rearview Mirrors ...... 2-35 Q Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-3 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...... 4-30 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 1-13 Remote Keyless Entry System ...... 2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ...... 2-5 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the R Spare Tire ...... 5-80 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 5-29 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-78 Radio Data System (RDS) ...... 3-42, 3-55 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-59 Radio Messages ...... 3-47 Replacing Brake System Parts ...... 5-44 Radios ...... 3-41 Replacing Restraint System Parts After Care of Your CD Player ...... 3-64 a Crash ...... 1-57 Care of Your CDs ...... 3-64 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 7-10 Navigation/Radio System ...... 3-63 Canadian Government ...... 7-10 Radio with CD ...... 3-42 General Motors ...... 7-11 Radio with Six-Disc CD ...... 3-52 United States Government ...... 7-10 Setting the Time ...... 3-41 Restraint System Check ...... 6-20 Understanding Reception ...... 3-63 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-56 RDS Messages ...... 3-46, 3-56 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ...... 1-57

10 Restraint Systems ...... 1-56 Seats ...... 1-3 Checking ...... 1-56 Driver Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 Replacing Parts ...... 1-57 Head Restraints ...... 1-5 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-22 Manual ...... 1-2 Roadside ...... 7-6 Passenger Folding Seatback ...... 1-5 Assistance Program ...... 7-6 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-7 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ...... 4-28 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-3 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ...... 2-34 Securing a Child Restraint ...... 1-41 Designed for the LATCH System ...... 1-41 Rear Seat Position ...... 1-42 S Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-44 Security While You Travel ...... 7-6 Safety Belt ...... 1-26 Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance ...... 6-5 Pretensioners ...... 1-26 Service ...... 5-3 Reminder Light ...... 3-28 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Safety Belts ...... 5-92 Vehicle ...... 5-4 Care of ...... 5-92 Doing Your Own Work ...... 5-3 Driver Position ...... 1-14 Engine Soon Light ...... 3-34 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ...... 1-14 Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-11 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13 Service Bulletins ...... 7-12 Rear Seat Passengers ...... 1-22 Service Manuals ...... 7-11 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-22 Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ...... 3-46, 3-56 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-26 Setting Preset Stations ...... 3-44, 3-53 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-21 Setting the Time ...... 3-41 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ...... 1-8 Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) ...... 3-44, 3-54 Safety Chains ...... 4-37 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-94 Safety Warnings and Symbols ...... iii Shift Speeds ...... 2-26 Seat Operation Check ...... 6-21 Shifting Into Park (P) ...... 2-28 Seatback, Folding Passenger ...... 1-5

11 Shifting Out of Park (P) ...... 2-30 Sun Visors ...... 2-13 Short Trip/City Definition ...... 6-5 Sunroof ...... 2-42 Short Trip/City Intervals ...... 6-5 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 1-47 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-7 How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ...... 1-53 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...... 1-16 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 1-56 Six-Speed ...... 2-24 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ...... 1-53 Skidding ...... 4-14 What Will You See After an Air Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ...... 4-18 Bag Inflates? ...... 1-54 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ...... 5-90 When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ...... 1-52 Specifications, Capacities ...... 5-101 Where Are the Air Bags? ...... 1-50 Speedometer ...... 3-27 Starter Switch Check ...... 6-21 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-18 T Steering ...... 4-9 Tachometer ...... 3-28 Steering in Emergencies ...... 4-11 Temperature Display ...... 3-28 Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot Testing the Alarm ...... 2-14 and Seal Inspection ...... 6-24 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-13 Steering Tips ...... 4-10 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-13 Storage Areas ...... 2-37 Throttle System Inspection ...... 6-25 Center Console Storage Area ...... 2-37 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-5 Coinholder(s) ...... 2-37 Tire Inflation Check ...... 6-19 Cupholder(s) ...... 2-37 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-62 Glove Box ...... 2-37 Tire Size ...... 5-64 Instrument Panel Storage Area ...... 2-37 Tire Terminology and Definitions ...... 5-65 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-38 Tires ...... 5-61, 5-94 Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ...... 2-40 Buying New Tires ...... 5-71 Rear Storage Area ...... 2-40 Chains ...... 5-75 Storing the Flat Tire and Tools ...... 5-85 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-77 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 5-87 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-88 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...... 4-28

12 Tires (cont.) Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer ...... 4-39 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-76 Inflation — Tire Pressure ...... 5-67 Inspection and Rotation ...... 5-68 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 5-72 Underbody Flushing Service ...... 6-23 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 5-73 Understanding Radio Reception ...... 3-63 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-74 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 5-72 When It Is Time for New Tires ...... 5-70 United States – Customer Assistance ...... 7-4 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater ...... 2-19 Used Replacement Wheels ...... 5-75 Top Strap ...... 1-36 Using Cleaner on Fabric ...... 5-90 Top Strap Anchor Location ...... 1-38 Using Song List Mode ...... 3-61 Torque Lock ...... 2-30 Using the Recovery Hook ...... 4-29 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires ...... 4-36 Towing ...... 4-30 Recreational Vehicle ...... 4-30 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-34 V Your Vehicle ...... 4-30 Vehicle ...... 4-5 Trailer Brakes ...... 4-37 Control ...... 4-5 Transaxle ...... 5-23 Damage Warnings ...... iv Fluid, Automatic ...... 5-23 Loading ...... 4-32 Fluid, Manual ...... 5-25 Parking Your ...... 2-31 Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...... 2-20 Symbols ...... iv Transaxle Operation, Manual ...... 2-23 Vehicle Identification ...... 5-97 Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) ...... 5-51 Number (VIN) ...... 5-97 Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit Service Parts Identification Label ...... 5-97 Repair Manual ...... 7-11 Vehicle Storage ...... 5-44 Transportation Options ...... 7-8 Ventilation Adjustment ...... 3-22 Trip Odometers ...... 3-27 Visor Vanity Mirror ...... 2-13 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 3-6 Visors ...... 2-13 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ...... 3-5

13 Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-36 W Why Safety Belts Work ...... 1-10 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ...... 3-25 Windows ...... 2-11 Warnings ...... 3-4 Manual ...... 2-11 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-4 Power ...... 2-12 Other Warning Devices ...... 3-4 Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades ...... 5-93 Safety and Symbols ...... iii Windshield Washer ...... 3-8 Vehicle Damage ...... iv Fluid ...... 5-39 Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...... 3-39 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ...... 6-19 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-92 Windshield Wiper ...... 5-60 Weatherstrip Lubrication ...... 6-20 Blade Replacement ...... 5-60 Weight of the Trailer Tongue ...... 4-36 Fuses ...... 5-98 Weight of the Trailer ...... 4-35 Windshield Wipers ...... 3-7 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ...... 5-18 Winter Driving ...... 4-24 What to Do with Used Oil ...... 5-21 Wiper Blade Check ...... 6-20 What to Use ...... 5-28, 5-38, 5-39 Wheels ...... 5-73 Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 5-73 X Replacement ...... 5-74 When to Add Engine Oil ...... 5-17 XM™ Radio Satellite Service (USA Only) ...... 3-42 When to Change Engine Oil ...... 5-20 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 3-64 When to Check ...... 5-25, 5-68 XM™ Satellite Radio Service (USA Only) ...... 3-64 When to Check and Change ...... 5-23 When to Check and What to Use ...... 5-27 When to Check Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-38 Y When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... 6-2 on a Hill ...... 4-40